| 1 | /****************************************************************************
|
|---|
| 2 | **
|
|---|
| 3 | ** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
|
|---|
| 4 | ** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
|
|---|
| 5 | **
|
|---|
| 6 | ** This file is part of the QtGui module of the Qt Toolkit.
|
|---|
| 7 | **
|
|---|
| 8 | ** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
|
|---|
| 9 | ** Commercial Usage
|
|---|
| 10 | ** Licensees holding valid Qt Commercial licenses may use this file in
|
|---|
| 11 | ** accordance with the Qt Commercial License Agreement provided with the
|
|---|
| 12 | ** Software or, alternatively, in accordance with the terms contained in
|
|---|
| 13 | ** a written agreement between you and Nokia.
|
|---|
| 14 | **
|
|---|
| 15 | ** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
|
|---|
| 16 | ** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
|
|---|
| 17 | ** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
|
|---|
| 18 | ** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
|
|---|
| 19 | ** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to
|
|---|
| 20 | ** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
|
|---|
| 21 | ** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
|
|---|
| 22 | **
|
|---|
| 23 | ** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
|
|---|
| 24 | ** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
|
|---|
| 25 | ** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
|
|---|
| 26 | ** package.
|
|---|
| 27 | **
|
|---|
| 28 | ** GNU General Public License Usage
|
|---|
| 29 | ** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
|
|---|
| 30 | ** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
|
|---|
| 31 | ** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
|
|---|
| 32 | ** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to
|
|---|
| 33 | ** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
|
|---|
| 34 | ** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
|
|---|
| 35 | **
|
|---|
| 36 | ** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
|
|---|
| 37 | ** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
|
|---|
| 38 | ** $QT_END_LICENSE$
|
|---|
| 39 | **
|
|---|
| 40 | ****************************************************************************/
|
|---|
| 41 |
|
|---|
| 42 | #include "qstyleoption.h"
|
|---|
| 43 | #include "qapplication.h"
|
|---|
| 44 | #ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|---|
| 45 | # include "private/qt_mac_p.h"
|
|---|
| 46 | # include "qmacstyle_mac.h"
|
|---|
| 47 | #endif
|
|---|
| 48 | #ifndef QT_NO_DEBUG
|
|---|
| 49 | #include <qdebug.h>
|
|---|
| 50 | #endif
|
|---|
| 51 |
|
|---|
| 52 | QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE
|
|---|
| 53 |
|
|---|
| 54 | /*!
|
|---|
| 55 | \class QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 56 | \brief The QStyleOption class stores the parameters used by QStyle functions.
|
|---|
| 57 |
|
|---|
| 58 | \ingroup appearance
|
|---|
| 59 |
|
|---|
| 60 | QStyleOption and its subclasses contain all the information that
|
|---|
| 61 | QStyle functions need to draw a graphical element.
|
|---|
| 62 |
|
|---|
| 63 | For performance reasons, there are few member functions and the
|
|---|
| 64 | access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the \c . or
|
|---|
| 65 | \c -> operator). This low-level feel makes the structures
|
|---|
| 66 | straightforward to use and emphasizes that these are simply
|
|---|
| 67 | parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 68 |
|
|---|
| 69 | The caller of a QStyle function usually creates QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 70 | objects on the stack. This combined with Qt's extensive use of
|
|---|
| 71 | \l{implicit sharing} for types such as QString, QPalette, and
|
|---|
| 72 | QColor ensures that no memory allocation needlessly takes place.
|
|---|
| 73 |
|
|---|
| 74 | The following code snippet shows how to use a specific
|
|---|
| 75 | QStyleOption subclass to paint a push button:
|
|---|
| 76 |
|
|---|
| 77 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 0
|
|---|
| 78 |
|
|---|
| 79 | In our example, the control is a QStyle::CE_PushButton, and
|
|---|
| 80 | according to the QStyle::drawControl() documentation the
|
|---|
| 81 | corresponding class is QStyleOptionButton.
|
|---|
| 82 |
|
|---|
| 83 | When reimplementing QStyle functions that take a QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 84 | parameter, you often need to cast the QStyleOption to a subclass.
|
|---|
| 85 | For safety, you can use qstyleoption_cast() to ensure that the
|
|---|
| 86 | pointer type is correct. For example:
|
|---|
| 87 |
|
|---|
| 88 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 4
|
|---|
| 89 |
|
|---|
| 90 | The qstyleoption_cast() function will return 0 if the object to
|
|---|
| 91 | which \c option points is not of the correct type.
|
|---|
| 92 |
|
|---|
| 93 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 94 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 95 |
|
|---|
| 96 | \sa QStyle, QStylePainter
|
|---|
| 97 | */
|
|---|
| 98 |
|
|---|
| 99 | /*!
|
|---|
| 100 | \enum QStyleOption::OptionType
|
|---|
| 101 |
|
|---|
| 102 | This enum is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 103 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 104 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 105 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 106 |
|
|---|
| 107 | \value SO_Button \l QStyleOptionButton
|
|---|
| 108 | \value SO_ComboBox \l QStyleOptionComboBox
|
|---|
| 109 | \value SO_Complex \l QStyleOptionComplex
|
|---|
| 110 | \value SO_Default QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 111 | \value SO_DockWidget \l QStyleOptionDockWidget
|
|---|
| 112 | \value SO_FocusRect \l QStyleOptionFocusRect
|
|---|
| 113 | \value SO_Frame \l QStyleOptionFrame \l QStyleOptionFrameV2
|
|---|
| 114 | \value SO_GraphicsItem \l QStyleOptionGraphicsItem
|
|---|
| 115 | \value SO_GroupBox \l QStyleOptionGroupBox
|
|---|
| 116 | \value SO_Header \l QStyleOptionHeader
|
|---|
| 117 | \value SO_MenuItem \l QStyleOptionMenuItem
|
|---|
| 118 | \value SO_ProgressBar \l QStyleOptionProgressBar \l QStyleOptionProgressBarV2
|
|---|
| 119 | \value SO_RubberBand \l QStyleOptionRubberBand
|
|---|
| 120 | \value SO_SizeGrip \l QStyleOptionSizeGrip
|
|---|
| 121 | \value SO_Slider \l QStyleOptionSlider
|
|---|
| 122 | \value SO_SpinBox \l QStyleOptionSpinBox
|
|---|
| 123 | \value SO_Tab \l QStyleOptionTab
|
|---|
| 124 | \value SO_TabBarBase \l QStyleOptionTabBarBase
|
|---|
| 125 | \value SO_TabWidgetFrame \l QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame
|
|---|
| 126 | \value SO_TitleBar \l QStyleOptionTitleBar
|
|---|
| 127 | \value SO_ToolBar \l QStyleOptionToolBar
|
|---|
| 128 | \value SO_ToolBox \l QStyleOptionToolBox
|
|---|
| 129 | \value SO_ToolButton \l QStyleOptionToolButton
|
|---|
| 130 | \value SO_ViewItem \l QStyleOptionViewItem (used in Interviews)
|
|---|
| 131 |
|
|---|
| 132 | The following values are used for custom controls:
|
|---|
| 133 |
|
|---|
| 134 | \value SO_CustomBase Reserved for custom QStyleOptions;
|
|---|
| 135 | all custom controls values must be above this value
|
|---|
| 136 | \value SO_ComplexCustomBase Reserved for custom QStyleOptions;
|
|---|
| 137 | all custom complex controls values must be above this value
|
|---|
| 138 |
|
|---|
| 139 | Some style options are defined for various Qt3Support controls:
|
|---|
| 140 |
|
|---|
| 141 | \value SO_Q3DockWindow \l QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow
|
|---|
| 142 | \value SO_Q3ListView \l QStyleOptionQ3ListView
|
|---|
| 143 | \value SO_Q3ListViewItem \l QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem
|
|---|
| 144 |
|
|---|
| 145 | \sa type
|
|---|
| 146 | */
|
|---|
| 147 |
|
|---|
| 148 | /*!
|
|---|
| 149 | Constructs a QStyleOption with the specified \a version and \a
|
|---|
| 150 | type.
|
|---|
| 151 |
|
|---|
| 152 | The version has no special meaning for QStyleOption; it can be
|
|---|
| 153 | used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of
|
|---|
| 154 | the same option type.
|
|---|
| 155 |
|
|---|
| 156 | The \l state member variable is initialized to
|
|---|
| 157 | QStyle::State_None.
|
|---|
| 158 |
|
|---|
| 159 | \sa version, type
|
|---|
| 160 | */
|
|---|
| 161 |
|
|---|
| 162 | QStyleOption::QStyleOption(int version, int type)
|
|---|
| 163 | : version(version), type(type), state(QStyle::State_None),
|
|---|
| 164 | direction(QApplication::layoutDirection()), fontMetrics(QFont())
|
|---|
| 165 | {
|
|---|
| 166 | }
|
|---|
| 167 |
|
|---|
| 168 |
|
|---|
| 169 | /*!
|
|---|
| 170 | Destroys this style option object.
|
|---|
| 171 | */
|
|---|
| 172 | QStyleOption::~QStyleOption()
|
|---|
| 173 | {
|
|---|
| 174 | }
|
|---|
| 175 |
|
|---|
| 176 | /*!
|
|---|
| 177 | \fn void QStyleOption::initFrom(const QWidget *widget)
|
|---|
| 178 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 179 |
|
|---|
| 180 | Initializes the \l state, \l direction, \l rect, \l palette, and
|
|---|
| 181 | \l fontMetrics member variables based on the specified \a widget.
|
|---|
| 182 |
|
|---|
| 183 | This is a convenience function; the member variables can also be
|
|---|
| 184 | initialized manually.
|
|---|
| 185 |
|
|---|
| 186 | \sa QWidget::layoutDirection(), QWidget::rect(),
|
|---|
| 187 | QWidget::palette(), QWidget::fontMetrics()
|
|---|
| 188 | */
|
|---|
| 189 |
|
|---|
| 190 | /*!
|
|---|
| 191 | \obsolete
|
|---|
| 192 |
|
|---|
| 193 | Use initFrom(\a widget) instead.
|
|---|
| 194 | */
|
|---|
| 195 | void QStyleOption::init(const QWidget *widget)
|
|---|
| 196 | {
|
|---|
| 197 | QWidget *window = widget->window();
|
|---|
| 198 | state = QStyle::State_None;
|
|---|
| 199 | if (widget->isEnabled())
|
|---|
| 200 | state |= QStyle::State_Enabled;
|
|---|
| 201 | if (widget->hasFocus())
|
|---|
| 202 | state |= QStyle::State_HasFocus;
|
|---|
| 203 | if (window->testAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange))
|
|---|
| 204 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange;
|
|---|
| 205 | if (widget->underMouse())
|
|---|
| 206 | state |= QStyle::State_MouseOver;
|
|---|
| 207 | if (window->isActiveWindow())
|
|---|
| 208 | state |= QStyle::State_Active;
|
|---|
| 209 | if (widget->isWindow())
|
|---|
| 210 | state |= QStyle::State_Window;
|
|---|
| 211 | #ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|---|
| 212 | extern bool qt_mac_can_clickThrough(const QWidget *w); //qwidget_mac.cpp
|
|---|
| 213 | if (!(state & QStyle::State_Active) && !qt_mac_can_clickThrough(widget))
|
|---|
| 214 | state &= ~QStyle::State_Enabled;
|
|---|
| 215 |
|
|---|
| 216 | switch (QMacStyle::widgetSizePolicy(widget)) {
|
|---|
| 217 | case QMacStyle::SizeSmall:
|
|---|
| 218 | state |= QStyle::State_Small;
|
|---|
| 219 | break;
|
|---|
| 220 | case QMacStyle::SizeMini:
|
|---|
| 221 | state |= QStyle::State_Mini;
|
|---|
| 222 | break;
|
|---|
| 223 | default:
|
|---|
| 224 | ;
|
|---|
| 225 | }
|
|---|
| 226 | #endif
|
|---|
| 227 | #ifdef QT_KEYPAD_NAVIGATION
|
|---|
| 228 | if (widget->hasEditFocus())
|
|---|
| 229 | state |= QStyle::State_HasEditFocus;
|
|---|
| 230 | #endif
|
|---|
| 231 |
|
|---|
| 232 | direction = widget->layoutDirection();
|
|---|
| 233 | rect = widget->rect();
|
|---|
| 234 | palette = widget->palette();
|
|---|
| 235 | fontMetrics = widget->fontMetrics();
|
|---|
| 236 | }
|
|---|
| 237 |
|
|---|
| 238 | /*!
|
|---|
| 239 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 240 | */
|
|---|
| 241 | QStyleOption::QStyleOption(const QStyleOption &other)
|
|---|
| 242 | : version(Version), type(Type), state(other.state),
|
|---|
| 243 | direction(other.direction), rect(other.rect), fontMetrics(other.fontMetrics),
|
|---|
| 244 | palette(other.palette)
|
|---|
| 245 | {
|
|---|
| 246 | }
|
|---|
| 247 |
|
|---|
| 248 | /*!
|
|---|
| 249 | Assign \a other to this QStyleOption.
|
|---|
| 250 | */
|
|---|
| 251 | QStyleOption &QStyleOption::operator=(const QStyleOption &other)
|
|---|
| 252 | {
|
|---|
| 253 | state = other.state;
|
|---|
| 254 | direction = other.direction;
|
|---|
| 255 | rect = other.rect;
|
|---|
| 256 | fontMetrics = other.fontMetrics;
|
|---|
| 257 | palette = other.palette;
|
|---|
| 258 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 259 | }
|
|---|
| 260 |
|
|---|
| 261 | /*!
|
|---|
| 262 | \enum QStyleOption::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 263 |
|
|---|
| 264 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 265 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 266 |
|
|---|
| 267 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Default} for
|
|---|
| 268 | this class).
|
|---|
| 269 |
|
|---|
| 270 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 271 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 272 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 273 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 274 |
|
|---|
| 275 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 276 | */
|
|---|
| 277 |
|
|---|
| 278 | /*!
|
|---|
| 279 | \enum QStyleOption::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 280 |
|
|---|
| 281 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 282 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 283 |
|
|---|
| 284 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 285 |
|
|---|
| 286 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 287 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 288 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 289 |
|
|---|
| 290 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 291 | */
|
|---|
| 292 |
|
|---|
| 293 | /*!
|
|---|
| 294 | \variable QStyleOption::palette
|
|---|
| 295 | \brief the palette that should be used when painting the control
|
|---|
| 296 |
|
|---|
| 297 | By default, the application's default palette is used.
|
|---|
| 298 |
|
|---|
| 299 | \sa initFrom()
|
|---|
| 300 | */
|
|---|
| 301 |
|
|---|
| 302 | /*!
|
|---|
| 303 | \variable QStyleOption::direction
|
|---|
| 304 | \brief the text layout direction that should be used when drawing text in the control
|
|---|
| 305 |
|
|---|
| 306 | By default, the layout direction is Qt::LeftToRight.
|
|---|
| 307 |
|
|---|
| 308 | \sa initFrom()
|
|---|
| 309 | */
|
|---|
| 310 |
|
|---|
| 311 | /*!
|
|---|
| 312 | \variable QStyleOption::fontMetrics
|
|---|
| 313 | \brief the font metrics that should be used when drawing text in the control
|
|---|
| 314 |
|
|---|
| 315 | By default, the application's default font is used.
|
|---|
| 316 |
|
|---|
| 317 | \sa initFrom()
|
|---|
| 318 | */
|
|---|
| 319 |
|
|---|
| 320 | /*!
|
|---|
| 321 | \variable QStyleOption::rect
|
|---|
| 322 | \brief the area that should be used for various calculations and painting
|
|---|
| 323 |
|
|---|
| 324 | This can have different meanings for different types of elements.
|
|---|
| 325 | For example, for a \l QStyle::CE_PushButton element it would be
|
|---|
| 326 | the rectangle for the entire button, while for a \l
|
|---|
| 327 | QStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel element it would be just the area for
|
|---|
| 328 | the push button label.
|
|---|
| 329 |
|
|---|
| 330 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both
|
|---|
| 331 | the width and the height set to 0.
|
|---|
| 332 |
|
|---|
| 333 | \sa initFrom()
|
|---|
| 334 | */
|
|---|
| 335 |
|
|---|
| 336 | /*!
|
|---|
| 337 | \variable QStyleOption::state
|
|---|
| 338 | \brief the style flags that are used when drawing the control
|
|---|
| 339 |
|
|---|
| 340 | The default value is QStyle::State_None.
|
|---|
| 341 |
|
|---|
| 342 | \sa initFrom(), QStyle::drawPrimitive(), QStyle::drawControl(),
|
|---|
| 343 | QStyle::drawComplexControl(), QStyle::State
|
|---|
| 344 | */
|
|---|
| 345 |
|
|---|
| 346 | /*!
|
|---|
| 347 | \variable QStyleOption::type
|
|---|
| 348 | \brief the option type of the style option
|
|---|
| 349 |
|
|---|
| 350 | The default value is SO_Default.
|
|---|
| 351 |
|
|---|
| 352 | \sa OptionType
|
|---|
| 353 | */
|
|---|
| 354 |
|
|---|
| 355 | /*!
|
|---|
| 356 | \variable QStyleOption::version
|
|---|
| 357 | \brief the version of the style option
|
|---|
| 358 |
|
|---|
| 359 | This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 360 | without breaking compatibility. If you use the qstyleoption_cast()
|
|---|
| 361 | function, you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 362 |
|
|---|
| 363 | The default value is 1.
|
|---|
| 364 | */
|
|---|
| 365 |
|
|---|
| 366 | /*!
|
|---|
| 367 | \class QStyleOptionFocusRect
|
|---|
| 368 | \brief The QStyleOptionFocusRect class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 369 | parameters for drawing a focus rectangle with QStyle.
|
|---|
| 370 |
|
|---|
| 371 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 372 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 373 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 374 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 375 |
|
|---|
| 376 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 377 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 378 |
|
|---|
| 379 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 380 | */
|
|---|
| 381 |
|
|---|
| 382 | /*!
|
|---|
| 383 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFocusRect, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 384 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 385 | */
|
|---|
| 386 |
|
|---|
| 387 | QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect()
|
|---|
| 388 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_FocusRect)
|
|---|
| 389 | {
|
|---|
| 390 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange; // assume we had one, will be corrected in initFrom()
|
|---|
| 391 | }
|
|---|
| 392 |
|
|---|
| 393 | /*!
|
|---|
| 394 | \internal
|
|---|
| 395 | */
|
|---|
| 396 | QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect(int version)
|
|---|
| 397 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_FocusRect)
|
|---|
| 398 | {
|
|---|
| 399 | state |= QStyle::State_KeyboardFocusChange; // assume we had one, will be corrected in initFrom()
|
|---|
| 400 | }
|
|---|
| 401 |
|
|---|
| 402 | /*!
|
|---|
| 403 | \enum QStyleOptionFocusRect::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 404 |
|
|---|
| 405 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 406 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 407 |
|
|---|
| 408 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_FocusRect} for this class).
|
|---|
| 409 |
|
|---|
| 410 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 411 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 412 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 413 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 414 |
|
|---|
| 415 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 416 | */
|
|---|
| 417 |
|
|---|
| 418 | /*!
|
|---|
| 419 | \enum QStyleOptionFocusRect::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 420 |
|
|---|
| 421 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 422 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 423 |
|
|---|
| 424 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 425 |
|
|---|
| 426 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 427 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 428 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 429 |
|
|---|
| 430 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 431 | */
|
|---|
| 432 |
|
|---|
| 433 | /*!
|
|---|
| 434 | \fn QStyleOptionFocusRect::QStyleOptionFocusRect(const QStyleOptionFocusRect &other)
|
|---|
| 435 |
|
|---|
| 436 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 437 | */
|
|---|
| 438 |
|
|---|
| 439 | /*!
|
|---|
| 440 | \variable QStyleOptionFocusRect::backgroundColor
|
|---|
| 441 | \brief the background color on which the focus rectangle is being drawn
|
|---|
| 442 |
|
|---|
| 443 | The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0,
|
|---|
| 444 | 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for
|
|---|
| 445 | the underlying window system.
|
|---|
| 446 | */
|
|---|
| 447 |
|
|---|
| 448 | /*!
|
|---|
| 449 | \class QStyleOptionFrame
|
|---|
| 450 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrame class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 451 | parameters for drawing a frame.
|
|---|
| 452 |
|
|---|
| 453 | QStyleOptionFrame is used for drawing several built-in Qt widgets,
|
|---|
| 454 | including QFrame, QGroupBox, QLineEdit, and QMenu. Note that to
|
|---|
| 455 | describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or
|
|---|
| 456 | above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass.
|
|---|
| 457 |
|
|---|
| 458 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrame class has
|
|---|
| 459 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and \l{QStyleOption::version}
|
|---|
| 460 | {version} 1.
|
|---|
| 461 |
|
|---|
| 462 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 463 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 464 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 465 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 466 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 467 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 468 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 469 |
|
|---|
| 470 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 471 | QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2.
|
|---|
| 472 |
|
|---|
| 473 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 474 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 475 |
|
|---|
| 476 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 477 | */
|
|---|
| 478 |
|
|---|
| 479 | /*!
|
|---|
| 480 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrame, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 481 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 482 | */
|
|---|
| 483 |
|
|---|
| 484 | QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame()
|
|---|
| 485 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Frame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 486 | {
|
|---|
| 487 | }
|
|---|
| 488 |
|
|---|
| 489 | /*!
|
|---|
| 490 | \internal
|
|---|
| 491 | */
|
|---|
| 492 | QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame(int version)
|
|---|
| 493 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Frame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 494 | {
|
|---|
| 495 | }
|
|---|
| 496 |
|
|---|
| 497 | /*!
|
|---|
| 498 | \fn QStyleOptionFrame::QStyleOptionFrame(const QStyleOptionFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 499 |
|
|---|
| 500 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 501 | */
|
|---|
| 502 |
|
|---|
| 503 | /*!
|
|---|
| 504 | \enum QStyleOptionFrame::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 505 |
|
|---|
| 506 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 507 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 508 |
|
|---|
| 509 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Frame} for this class).
|
|---|
| 510 |
|
|---|
| 511 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 512 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 513 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 514 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 515 |
|
|---|
| 516 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 517 | */
|
|---|
| 518 |
|
|---|
| 519 | /*!
|
|---|
| 520 | \enum QStyleOptionFrame::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 521 |
|
|---|
| 522 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 523 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 524 |
|
|---|
| 525 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 526 |
|
|---|
| 527 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 528 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 529 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 530 |
|
|---|
| 531 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 532 | */
|
|---|
| 533 |
|
|---|
| 534 | /*!
|
|---|
| 535 | \variable QStyleOptionFrame::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 536 | \brief the line width for drawing the frame
|
|---|
| 537 |
|
|---|
| 538 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 539 |
|
|---|
| 540 | \sa QFrame::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 541 | */
|
|---|
| 542 |
|
|---|
| 543 | /*!
|
|---|
| 544 | \variable QStyleOptionFrame::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 545 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the frame
|
|---|
| 546 |
|
|---|
| 547 | This is usually used in drawing sunken or raised frames.
|
|---|
| 548 |
|
|---|
| 549 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 550 |
|
|---|
| 551 | \sa QFrame::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 552 | */
|
|---|
| 553 |
|
|---|
| 554 | /*!
|
|---|
| 555 | \class QStyleOptionFrameV2
|
|---|
| 556 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrameV2 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 557 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above.
|
|---|
| 558 |
|
|---|
| 559 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 560 |
|
|---|
| 561 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 inherits QStyleOptionFrame which is used for
|
|---|
| 562 | drawing several built-in Qt widgets, including QFrame, QGroupBox,
|
|---|
| 563 | QLineEdit, and QMenu.
|
|---|
| 564 |
|
|---|
| 565 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 class has
|
|---|
| 566 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and
|
|---|
| 567 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used
|
|---|
| 568 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 569 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 570 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 571 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 572 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 573 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 574 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 575 |
|
|---|
| 576 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 577 | QStyleOptionFrame and QStyleOptionFrameV2. One way to achieve this
|
|---|
| 578 | is to use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy constructor. For example:
|
|---|
| 579 |
|
|---|
| 580 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 1
|
|---|
| 581 |
|
|---|
| 582 | In the example above: If the \c frameOption's version is 1, \l
|
|---|
| 583 | FrameFeature is set to \l None for \c frameOptionV2. If \c
|
|---|
| 584 | frameOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy the
|
|---|
| 585 | \c frameOption's \l FrameFeature value.
|
|---|
| 586 |
|
|---|
| 587 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 588 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 589 |
|
|---|
| 590 | \sa QStyleOptionFrame, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 591 | */
|
|---|
| 592 |
|
|---|
| 593 | /*!
|
|---|
| 594 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 object.
|
|---|
| 595 | */
|
|---|
| 596 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2()
|
|---|
| 597 | : QStyleOptionFrame(Version), features(None)
|
|---|
| 598 | {
|
|---|
| 599 | }
|
|---|
| 600 |
|
|---|
| 601 | /*!
|
|---|
| 602 | \fn QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(const QStyleOptionFrameV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 603 |
|
|---|
| 604 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 605 | */
|
|---|
| 606 |
|
|---|
| 607 | /*!
|
|---|
| 608 | \internal
|
|---|
| 609 | */
|
|---|
| 610 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 611 | : QStyleOptionFrame(version), features(None)
|
|---|
| 612 | {
|
|---|
| 613 | }
|
|---|
| 614 |
|
|---|
| 615 | /*!
|
|---|
| 616 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV2 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 617 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or
|
|---|
| 618 | QStyleOptionFrame types.
|
|---|
| 619 |
|
|---|
| 620 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l
|
|---|
| 621 | FrameFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If its
|
|---|
| 622 | version is 2, its \l FrameFeature value is simply copied to the
|
|---|
| 623 | new style option.
|
|---|
| 624 |
|
|---|
| 625 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 626 | */
|
|---|
| 627 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::QStyleOptionFrameV2(const QStyleOptionFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 628 | {
|
|---|
| 629 | QStyleOptionFrame::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 630 |
|
|---|
| 631 | const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 632 | features = f2 ? f2->features : FrameFeatures(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None);
|
|---|
| 633 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 634 | }
|
|---|
| 635 |
|
|---|
| 636 | /*!
|
|---|
| 637 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 638 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV2 or
|
|---|
| 639 | QStyleOptionFrame types.
|
|---|
| 640 |
|
|---|
| 641 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's
|
|---|
| 642 | \l FrameFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionFrameV2::None. If
|
|---|
| 643 | its version is 2, its \l FrameFeature value is simply copied to
|
|---|
| 644 | this style option.
|
|---|
| 645 | */
|
|---|
| 646 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 &QStyleOptionFrameV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 647 | {
|
|---|
| 648 | QStyleOptionFrame::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 649 |
|
|---|
| 650 | const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 651 | features = f2 ? f2->features : FrameFeatures(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None);
|
|---|
| 652 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 653 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 654 | }
|
|---|
| 655 |
|
|---|
| 656 | /*!
|
|---|
| 657 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature
|
|---|
| 658 |
|
|---|
| 659 | This enum describles the different types of features a frame can have.
|
|---|
| 660 |
|
|---|
| 661 | \value None Indicates a normal frame.
|
|---|
| 662 | \value Flat Indicates a flat frame.
|
|---|
| 663 | */
|
|---|
| 664 |
|
|---|
| 665 | /*!
|
|---|
| 666 | \variable QStyleOptionFrameV2::features
|
|---|
| 667 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this frame.
|
|---|
| 668 |
|
|---|
| 669 | \sa FrameFeature
|
|---|
| 670 | */
|
|---|
| 671 |
|
|---|
| 672 | /*!
|
|---|
| 673 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 674 |
|
|---|
| 675 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the
|
|---|
| 676 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 677 |
|
|---|
| 678 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 679 |
|
|---|
| 680 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 681 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 682 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 683 |
|
|---|
| 684 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 685 | */
|
|---|
| 686 |
|
|---|
| 687 | /*!
|
|---|
| 688 | \class QStyleOptionFrameV3
|
|---|
| 689 | \brief The QStyleOptionFrameV3 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 690 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.1 or above.
|
|---|
| 691 |
|
|---|
| 692 | \since 4.5
|
|---|
| 693 |
|
|---|
| 694 | QStyleOptionFrameV3 inherits QStyleOptionFrameV2
|
|---|
| 695 |
|
|---|
| 696 | An instance of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 class has
|
|---|
| 697 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_Frame and
|
|---|
| 698 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 3. The type is used
|
|---|
| 699 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 700 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 701 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 702 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 703 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 704 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 705 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 706 |
|
|---|
| 707 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 708 | */
|
|---|
| 709 |
|
|---|
| 710 | /*!
|
|---|
| 711 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 object.
|
|---|
| 712 | */
|
|---|
| 713 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3()
|
|---|
| 714 | : QStyleOptionFrameV2(Version), frameShape(QFrame::NoFrame)
|
|---|
| 715 | {
|
|---|
| 716 | }
|
|---|
| 717 |
|
|---|
| 718 | /*!
|
|---|
| 719 | \fn QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(const QStyleOptionFrameV3 &other)
|
|---|
| 720 |
|
|---|
| 721 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 722 | */
|
|---|
| 723 |
|
|---|
| 724 | /*!
|
|---|
| 725 | \internal
|
|---|
| 726 | */
|
|---|
| 727 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(int version)
|
|---|
| 728 | : QStyleOptionFrameV2(version), frameShape(QFrame::NoFrame)
|
|---|
| 729 | {
|
|---|
| 730 | }
|
|---|
| 731 |
|
|---|
| 732 | /*!
|
|---|
| 733 | Constructs a QStyleOptionFrameV3 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 734 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV3 or
|
|---|
| 735 | QStyleOptionFrame types.
|
|---|
| 736 |
|
|---|
| 737 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style
|
|---|
| 738 | option's \l FrameFeature value is set to
|
|---|
| 739 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV2::None}. If its version is 2 or lower,
|
|---|
| 740 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape} value is QFrame::NoFrame
|
|---|
| 741 |
|
|---|
| 742 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 743 | */
|
|---|
| 744 | QStyleOptionFrameV3::QStyleOptionFrameV3(const QStyleOptionFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 745 | {
|
|---|
| 746 | operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 747 | }
|
|---|
| 748 |
|
|---|
| 749 | /*!
|
|---|
| 750 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 751 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionFrameV3,
|
|---|
| 752 | QStyleOptionFrameV2 or QStyleOptionFrame types.
|
|---|
| 753 |
|
|---|
| 754 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style
|
|---|
| 755 | option's \l FrameFeature value is set to
|
|---|
| 756 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV2::None}. If its version is 2 or lower,
|
|---|
| 757 | \l{QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape} value is QFrame::NoFrame
|
|---|
| 758 | */
|
|---|
| 759 | QStyleOptionFrameV3 &QStyleOptionFrameV3::operator=(const QStyleOptionFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 760 | {
|
|---|
| 761 | QStyleOptionFrameV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 762 |
|
|---|
| 763 | const QStyleOptionFrameV3 *f3 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionFrameV3 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 764 | frameShape = f3 ? f3->frameShape : QFrame::NoFrame;
|
|---|
| 765 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 766 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 767 | }
|
|---|
| 768 |
|
|---|
| 769 |
|
|---|
| 770 | /*!
|
|---|
| 771 | \variable QStyleOptionFrameV3::frameShape
|
|---|
| 772 | \brief This property holds the frame shape value of the frame.
|
|---|
| 773 |
|
|---|
| 774 | \sa QFrame::frameShape
|
|---|
| 775 | */
|
|---|
| 776 |
|
|---|
| 777 | /*!
|
|---|
| 778 | \enum QStyleOptionFrameV3::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 779 |
|
|---|
| 780 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 781 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 782 |
|
|---|
| 783 | \value Version 3
|
|---|
| 784 |
|
|---|
| 785 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 786 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 787 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 788 |
|
|---|
| 789 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 790 | */
|
|---|
| 791 |
|
|---|
| 792 | /*!
|
|---|
| 793 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV2
|
|---|
| 794 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 795 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.2 or above.
|
|---|
| 796 | \since 4.2
|
|---|
| 797 |
|
|---|
| 798 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem.
|
|---|
| 799 |
|
|---|
| 800 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 class has
|
|---|
| 801 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and
|
|---|
| 802 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used internally
|
|---|
| 803 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to
|
|---|
| 804 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to
|
|---|
| 805 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 806 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 807 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 808 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not
|
|---|
| 809 | need to check it.
|
|---|
| 810 |
|
|---|
| 811 | See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion
|
|---|
| 812 | of how to handle "V2" classes.
|
|---|
| 813 |
|
|---|
| 814 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 815 | */
|
|---|
| 816 |
|
|---|
| 817 | /*!
|
|---|
| 818 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 819 |
|
|---|
| 820 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the
|
|---|
| 821 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 822 |
|
|---|
| 823 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 824 |
|
|---|
| 825 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 826 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 827 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 828 |
|
|---|
| 829 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 830 | */
|
|---|
| 831 |
|
|---|
| 832 | /*!
|
|---|
| 833 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV2::features
|
|---|
| 834 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this view item
|
|---|
| 835 |
|
|---|
| 836 | \sa ViewItemFeature
|
|---|
| 837 | */
|
|---|
| 838 |
|
|---|
| 839 | /*!
|
|---|
| 840 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 object.
|
|---|
| 841 | */
|
|---|
| 842 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2()
|
|---|
| 843 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(Version), features(None)
|
|---|
| 844 | {
|
|---|
| 845 | }
|
|---|
| 846 |
|
|---|
| 847 | /*!
|
|---|
| 848 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 849 |
|
|---|
| 850 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 851 | */
|
|---|
| 852 |
|
|---|
| 853 | /*!
|
|---|
| 854 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV2 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 855 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 or
|
|---|
| 856 | QStyleOptionViewItem types.
|
|---|
| 857 |
|
|---|
| 858 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style option's \l
|
|---|
| 859 | ViewItemFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None. If its
|
|---|
| 860 | version is 2, its \l ViewItemFeature value is simply copied to the
|
|---|
| 861 | new style option.
|
|---|
| 862 |
|
|---|
| 863 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 864 | */
|
|---|
| 865 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 866 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(Version)
|
|---|
| 867 | {
|
|---|
| 868 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 869 | }
|
|---|
| 870 |
|
|---|
| 871 | /*!
|
|---|
| 872 | \internal
|
|---|
| 873 | */
|
|---|
| 874 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::QStyleOptionViewItemV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 875 | : QStyleOptionViewItem(version)
|
|---|
| 876 | {
|
|---|
| 877 |
|
|---|
| 878 | }
|
|---|
| 879 |
|
|---|
| 880 | /*!
|
|---|
| 881 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 882 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2 or
|
|---|
| 883 | QStyleOptionViewItem types.
|
|---|
| 884 |
|
|---|
| 885 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's
|
|---|
| 886 | \l ViewItemFeature value is set to \l QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None.
|
|---|
| 887 | If its version is 2, its \l ViewItemFeature value is simply copied
|
|---|
| 888 | to this style option.
|
|---|
| 889 | */
|
|---|
| 890 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2 &QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 891 | {
|
|---|
| 892 | QStyleOptionViewItem::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 893 | const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 *v2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 894 | features = v2 ? v2->features : ViewItemFeatures(QStyleOptionViewItemV2::None);
|
|---|
| 895 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 896 | }
|
|---|
| 897 |
|
|---|
| 898 | /*!
|
|---|
| 899 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV2::ViewItemFeature
|
|---|
| 900 |
|
|---|
| 901 | This enum describles the different types of features an item can have.
|
|---|
| 902 |
|
|---|
| 903 | \value None Indicates a normal item.
|
|---|
| 904 | \value WrapText Indicates an item with wrapped text.
|
|---|
| 905 | \value Alternate Indicates that the item's background is rendered using alternateBase.
|
|---|
| 906 | \value HasCheckIndicator Indicates that the item has a check state indicator.
|
|---|
| 907 | \value HasDisplay Indicates that the item has a display role.
|
|---|
| 908 | \value HasDecoration Indicates that the item has a decoration role.
|
|---|
| 909 | */
|
|---|
| 910 |
|
|---|
| 911 |
|
|---|
| 912 |
|
|---|
| 913 | /*!
|
|---|
| 914 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV3
|
|---|
| 915 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 916 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above.
|
|---|
| 917 | \since 4.3
|
|---|
| 918 |
|
|---|
| 919 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 inherits QStyleOptionViewItem.
|
|---|
| 920 |
|
|---|
| 921 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 class has
|
|---|
| 922 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and \l{QStyleOption::version}
|
|---|
| 923 | {version} 3. The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses,
|
|---|
| 924 | and qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In general
|
|---|
| 925 | you do not need to worry about this unless you want to create your own
|
|---|
| 926 | QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The version is used by
|
|---|
| 927 | QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 928 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to
|
|---|
| 929 | check it.
|
|---|
| 930 |
|
|---|
| 931 | See QStyleOptionFrameV2's detailed description for a discussion
|
|---|
| 932 | of how to handle "V2" and other versioned classes.
|
|---|
| 933 |
|
|---|
| 934 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 935 | */
|
|---|
| 936 |
|
|---|
| 937 | /*!
|
|---|
| 938 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV3::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 939 |
|
|---|
| 940 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the
|
|---|
| 941 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 942 |
|
|---|
| 943 | \value Version 3
|
|---|
| 944 |
|
|---|
| 945 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 946 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 947 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 948 |
|
|---|
| 949 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 950 | */
|
|---|
| 951 |
|
|---|
| 952 | /*!
|
|---|
| 953 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV3 object.
|
|---|
| 954 | */
|
|---|
| 955 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3()
|
|---|
| 956 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(Version)
|
|---|
| 957 | {
|
|---|
| 958 | }
|
|---|
| 959 |
|
|---|
| 960 | /*!
|
|---|
| 961 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 962 | */
|
|---|
| 963 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 964 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(Version)
|
|---|
| 965 | {
|
|---|
| 966 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 967 | }
|
|---|
| 968 |
|
|---|
| 969 | /*!
|
|---|
| 970 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(const QStyleOptionViewItemV3 &other)
|
|---|
| 971 |
|
|---|
| 972 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 973 | */
|
|---|
| 974 |
|
|---|
| 975 | /*!
|
|---|
| 976 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 977 | other style option can be an instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV2,
|
|---|
| 978 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or QStyleOptionViewItem types.
|
|---|
| 979 | */
|
|---|
| 980 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3 &QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator = (const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 981 | {
|
|---|
| 982 | QStyleOptionViewItemV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 983 | const QStyleOptionViewItemV3 *v3 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV3*>(&other);
|
|---|
| 984 | locale = v3 ? v3->locale : QLocale();
|
|---|
| 985 | widget = v3 ? v3->widget : 0;
|
|---|
| 986 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 987 | }
|
|---|
| 988 |
|
|---|
| 989 | /*!
|
|---|
| 990 | \internal
|
|---|
| 991 | */
|
|---|
| 992 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::QStyleOptionViewItemV3(int version)
|
|---|
| 993 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV2(version)
|
|---|
| 994 | {
|
|---|
| 995 | }
|
|---|
| 996 |
|
|---|
| 997 | #ifndef QT_NO_ITEMVIEWS
|
|---|
| 998 |
|
|---|
| 999 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1000 | \class QStyleOptionViewItemV4
|
|---|
| 1001 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1002 | parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.4 or above.
|
|---|
| 1003 | \since 4.4
|
|---|
| 1004 |
|
|---|
| 1005 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4 inherits QStyleOptionViewItemV3.
|
|---|
| 1006 |
|
|---|
| 1007 | An instance of the QStyleOptionViewItemV4 class has
|
|---|
| 1008 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ViewItem and
|
|---|
| 1009 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 4. The type is used internally
|
|---|
| 1010 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to
|
|---|
| 1011 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to
|
|---|
| 1012 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1013 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1014 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 1015 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not
|
|---|
| 1016 | need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1017 |
|
|---|
| 1018 | See QStyleOptionViewItemV3's detailed description for a discussion
|
|---|
| 1019 | of how to handle "V3" classes.
|
|---|
| 1020 |
|
|---|
| 1021 | \sa QStyleOptionViewItem, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1022 | */
|
|---|
| 1023 |
|
|---|
| 1024 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1025 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::index
|
|---|
| 1026 |
|
|---|
| 1027 | The model index that is to be drawn.
|
|---|
| 1028 | */
|
|---|
| 1029 |
|
|---|
| 1030 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1031 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::checkState
|
|---|
| 1032 |
|
|---|
| 1033 | If this view item is checkable, i.e.,
|
|---|
| 1034 | ViewItemFeature::HasCheckIndicator is true, \c checkState is true
|
|---|
| 1035 | if the item is checked; otherwise, it is false.
|
|---|
| 1036 |
|
|---|
| 1037 | */
|
|---|
| 1038 |
|
|---|
| 1039 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1040 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::icon
|
|---|
| 1041 |
|
|---|
| 1042 | The icon (if any) to be drawn in the view item.
|
|---|
| 1043 | */
|
|---|
| 1044 |
|
|---|
| 1045 |
|
|---|
| 1046 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1047 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::text
|
|---|
| 1048 |
|
|---|
| 1049 | The text (if any) to be drawn in the view item.
|
|---|
| 1050 | */
|
|---|
| 1051 |
|
|---|
| 1052 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1053 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::backgroundBrush
|
|---|
| 1054 |
|
|---|
| 1055 | The QBrush that should be used to paint the view items
|
|---|
| 1056 | background.
|
|---|
| 1057 | */
|
|---|
| 1058 |
|
|---|
| 1059 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1060 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItemV4::viewItemPosition
|
|---|
| 1061 |
|
|---|
| 1062 | Gives the position of this view item relative to other items. See
|
|---|
| 1063 | the \l{QStyleOptionViewItemV4::}{ViewItemPosition} enum for the
|
|---|
| 1064 | details.
|
|---|
| 1065 | */
|
|---|
| 1066 |
|
|---|
| 1067 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1068 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV4::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1069 |
|
|---|
| 1070 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the
|
|---|
| 1071 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1072 |
|
|---|
| 1073 | \value Version 4
|
|---|
| 1074 |
|
|---|
| 1075 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1076 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1077 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1078 |
|
|---|
| 1079 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1080 | */
|
|---|
| 1081 |
|
|---|
| 1082 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1083 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItemV4::ViewItemPosition
|
|---|
| 1084 |
|
|---|
| 1085 | This enum is used to represent the placement of the item on
|
|---|
| 1086 | a row. This can be used to draw items differently depending
|
|---|
| 1087 | on their placement, for example by putting rounded edges at
|
|---|
| 1088 | the beginning and end, and straight edges in between.
|
|---|
| 1089 |
|
|---|
| 1090 | \value Invalid The ViewItemPosition is unknown and should be
|
|---|
| 1091 | disregarded.
|
|---|
| 1092 | \value Beginning The item appears at the beginning of the row.
|
|---|
| 1093 | \value Middle The item appears in the middle of the row.
|
|---|
| 1094 | \value End The item appears at the end of the row.
|
|---|
| 1095 | \value OnlyOne The item is the only one on the row, and is
|
|---|
| 1096 | therefore both at the beginning and the end.
|
|---|
| 1097 | */
|
|---|
| 1098 |
|
|---|
| 1099 |
|
|---|
| 1100 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1101 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 object.
|
|---|
| 1102 | */
|
|---|
| 1103 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4()
|
|---|
| 1104 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(Version), checkState(Qt::Unchecked), viewItemPosition(QStyleOptionViewItemV4::Invalid)
|
|---|
| 1105 | {
|
|---|
| 1106 | }
|
|---|
| 1107 |
|
|---|
| 1108 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1109 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(const QStyleOptionViewItemV4 &other)
|
|---|
| 1110 |
|
|---|
| 1111 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 1112 | */
|
|---|
| 1113 |
|
|---|
| 1114 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1115 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItemV4 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 1116 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or
|
|---|
| 1117 | QStyleOptionViewItem types.
|
|---|
| 1118 |
|
|---|
| 1119 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 1120 | */
|
|---|
| 1121 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 1122 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(Version)
|
|---|
| 1123 | {
|
|---|
| 1124 | (void)QStyleOptionViewItemV4::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 1125 | }
|
|---|
| 1126 |
|
|---|
| 1127 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1128 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 1129 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionViewItemV3 or
|
|---|
| 1130 | QStyleOptionViewItem types.
|
|---|
| 1131 | */
|
|---|
| 1132 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4 &QStyleOptionViewItemV4::operator = (const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 1133 | {
|
|---|
| 1134 | QStyleOptionViewItemV3::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 1135 | if (const QStyleOptionViewItemV4 *v4 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionViewItemV4*>(&other)) {
|
|---|
| 1136 | index = v4->index;
|
|---|
| 1137 | checkState = v4->checkState;
|
|---|
| 1138 | text = v4->text;
|
|---|
| 1139 | viewItemPosition = v4->viewItemPosition;
|
|---|
| 1140 | backgroundBrush = v4->backgroundBrush;
|
|---|
| 1141 | icon = v4->icon;
|
|---|
| 1142 | } else {
|
|---|
| 1143 | viewItemPosition = QStyleOptionViewItemV4::Invalid;
|
|---|
| 1144 | checkState = Qt::Unchecked;
|
|---|
| 1145 | }
|
|---|
| 1146 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 1147 | }
|
|---|
| 1148 |
|
|---|
| 1149 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1150 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1151 | */
|
|---|
| 1152 | QStyleOptionViewItemV4::QStyleOptionViewItemV4(int version)
|
|---|
| 1153 | : QStyleOptionViewItemV3(version)
|
|---|
| 1154 | {
|
|---|
| 1155 | }
|
|---|
| 1156 | #endif // QT_NO_ITEMVIEWS
|
|---|
| 1157 |
|
|---|
| 1158 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1159 | \class QStyleOptionGroupBox
|
|---|
| 1160 | \brief The QStyleOptionGroupBox class describes the parameters for
|
|---|
| 1161 | drawing a group box.
|
|---|
| 1162 |
|
|---|
| 1163 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 1164 |
|
|---|
| 1165 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 1166 | functions need the various graphical elements of a group box.
|
|---|
| 1167 |
|
|---|
| 1168 | It holds the lineWidth and the midLineWidth for drawing the panel,
|
|---|
| 1169 | the group box's \l {text}{title} and the title's \l
|
|---|
| 1170 | {textAlignment}{alignment} and \l {textColor}{color}.
|
|---|
| 1171 |
|
|---|
| 1172 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 1173 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 1174 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 1175 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 1176 |
|
|---|
| 1177 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 1178 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 1179 |
|
|---|
| 1180 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QGroupBox
|
|---|
| 1181 | */
|
|---|
| 1182 |
|
|---|
| 1183 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1184 | \enum QStyleOptionGroupBox::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1185 |
|
|---|
| 1186 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1187 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1188 |
|
|---|
| 1189 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_GroupBox} for this class).
|
|---|
| 1190 |
|
|---|
| 1191 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 1192 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 1193 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 1194 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 1195 |
|
|---|
| 1196 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1197 | */
|
|---|
| 1198 |
|
|---|
| 1199 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1200 | \enum QStyleOptionGroupBox::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1201 |
|
|---|
| 1202 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1203 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1204 |
|
|---|
| 1205 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 1206 |
|
|---|
| 1207 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1208 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1209 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1210 |
|
|---|
| 1211 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1212 | */
|
|---|
| 1213 |
|
|---|
| 1214 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1215 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 1216 | \brief the line width for drawing the panel
|
|---|
| 1217 |
|
|---|
| 1218 | The value of this variable is, currently, always 1.
|
|---|
| 1219 |
|
|---|
| 1220 | \sa QFrame::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 1221 | */
|
|---|
| 1222 |
|
|---|
| 1223 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1224 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 1225 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the panel
|
|---|
| 1226 |
|
|---|
| 1227 | The mid-line width is usually used when drawing sunken or raised
|
|---|
| 1228 | group box frames. The value of this variable is, currently, always 0.
|
|---|
| 1229 |
|
|---|
| 1230 | \sa QFrame::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 1231 | */
|
|---|
| 1232 |
|
|---|
| 1233 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1234 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::text
|
|---|
| 1235 | \brief the text of the group box
|
|---|
| 1236 |
|
|---|
| 1237 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 1238 |
|
|---|
| 1239 | \sa QGroupBox::title
|
|---|
| 1240 | */
|
|---|
| 1241 |
|
|---|
| 1242 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1243 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::textAlignment
|
|---|
| 1244 | \brief the alignment of the group box title
|
|---|
| 1245 |
|
|---|
| 1246 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 1247 |
|
|---|
| 1248 | \sa QGroupBox::alignment
|
|---|
| 1249 | */
|
|---|
| 1250 |
|
|---|
| 1251 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1252 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::features
|
|---|
| 1253 | \brief the features of the group box frame
|
|---|
| 1254 |
|
|---|
| 1255 | The frame is flat by default.
|
|---|
| 1256 |
|
|---|
| 1257 | \sa QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeature
|
|---|
| 1258 | */
|
|---|
| 1259 |
|
|---|
| 1260 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1261 | \variable QStyleOptionGroupBox::textColor
|
|---|
| 1262 | \brief the color of the group box title
|
|---|
| 1263 |
|
|---|
| 1264 | The default value is an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0,
|
|---|
| 1265 | 0). An invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for
|
|---|
| 1266 | the underlying window system.
|
|---|
| 1267 | */
|
|---|
| 1268 |
|
|---|
| 1269 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1270 | Constructs a QStyleOptionGroupBox, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 1271 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 1272 | */
|
|---|
| 1273 | QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox()
|
|---|
| 1274 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, Type), features(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None),
|
|---|
| 1275 | textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 1276 | {
|
|---|
| 1277 | }
|
|---|
| 1278 |
|
|---|
| 1279 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1280 | \fn QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox(const QStyleOptionGroupBox &other)
|
|---|
| 1281 |
|
|---|
| 1282 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 1283 | */
|
|---|
| 1284 |
|
|---|
| 1285 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1286 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1287 | */
|
|---|
| 1288 | QStyleOptionGroupBox::QStyleOptionGroupBox(int version)
|
|---|
| 1289 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, Type), features(QStyleOptionFrameV2::None),
|
|---|
| 1290 | textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 1291 | {
|
|---|
| 1292 | }
|
|---|
| 1293 |
|
|---|
| 1294 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1295 | \class QStyleOptionHeader
|
|---|
| 1296 | \brief The QStyleOptionHeader class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1297 | parameters for drawing a header.
|
|---|
| 1298 |
|
|---|
| 1299 | QStyleOptionHeader contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 1300 | functions need to draw the item views' header pane, header sort
|
|---|
| 1301 | arrow, and header label.
|
|---|
| 1302 |
|
|---|
| 1303 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 1304 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 1305 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 1306 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 1307 |
|
|---|
| 1308 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 1309 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 1310 |
|
|---|
| 1311 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1312 | */
|
|---|
| 1313 |
|
|---|
| 1314 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1315 | Constructs a QStyleOptionHeader, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 1316 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 1317 | */
|
|---|
| 1318 |
|
|---|
| 1319 | QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader()
|
|---|
| 1320 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionHeader::Version, SO_Header),
|
|---|
| 1321 | section(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), iconAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft),
|
|---|
| 1322 | position(QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning),
|
|---|
| 1323 | selectedPosition(QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent), sortIndicator(None),
|
|---|
| 1324 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal)
|
|---|
| 1325 | {
|
|---|
| 1326 | }
|
|---|
| 1327 |
|
|---|
| 1328 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1329 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1330 | */
|
|---|
| 1331 | QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader(int version)
|
|---|
| 1332 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Header),
|
|---|
| 1333 | section(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), iconAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft),
|
|---|
| 1334 | position(QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning),
|
|---|
| 1335 | selectedPosition(QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent), sortIndicator(None),
|
|---|
| 1336 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal)
|
|---|
| 1337 | {
|
|---|
| 1338 | }
|
|---|
| 1339 |
|
|---|
| 1340 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1341 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::orientation
|
|---|
| 1342 | \brief the header's orientation (horizontal or vertical)
|
|---|
| 1343 |
|
|---|
| 1344 | The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal
|
|---|
| 1345 | */
|
|---|
| 1346 |
|
|---|
| 1347 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1348 | \fn QStyleOptionHeader::QStyleOptionHeader(const QStyleOptionHeader &other)
|
|---|
| 1349 |
|
|---|
| 1350 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 1351 | */
|
|---|
| 1352 |
|
|---|
| 1353 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1354 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1355 |
|
|---|
| 1356 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1357 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1358 |
|
|---|
| 1359 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Header} for this class).
|
|---|
| 1360 |
|
|---|
| 1361 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 1362 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 1363 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 1364 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 1365 |
|
|---|
| 1366 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1367 | */
|
|---|
| 1368 |
|
|---|
| 1369 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1370 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1371 |
|
|---|
| 1372 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1373 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1374 |
|
|---|
| 1375 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 1376 |
|
|---|
| 1377 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1378 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1379 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1380 |
|
|---|
| 1381 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1382 | */
|
|---|
| 1383 |
|
|---|
| 1384 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1385 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::section
|
|---|
| 1386 | \brief which section of the header is being painted
|
|---|
| 1387 |
|
|---|
| 1388 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 1389 | */
|
|---|
| 1390 |
|
|---|
| 1391 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1392 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::text
|
|---|
| 1393 | \brief the text of the header
|
|---|
| 1394 |
|
|---|
| 1395 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 1396 | */
|
|---|
| 1397 |
|
|---|
| 1398 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1399 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::textAlignment
|
|---|
| 1400 | \brief the alignment flags for the text of the header
|
|---|
| 1401 |
|
|---|
| 1402 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 1403 | */
|
|---|
| 1404 |
|
|---|
| 1405 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1406 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::icon
|
|---|
| 1407 | \brief the icon of the header
|
|---|
| 1408 |
|
|---|
| 1409 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 1410 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 1411 | */
|
|---|
| 1412 |
|
|---|
| 1413 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1414 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::iconAlignment
|
|---|
| 1415 | \brief the alignment flags for the icon of the header
|
|---|
| 1416 |
|
|---|
| 1417 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 1418 | */
|
|---|
| 1419 |
|
|---|
| 1420 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1421 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::position
|
|---|
| 1422 | \brief the section's position in relation to the other sections
|
|---|
| 1423 |
|
|---|
| 1424 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::Beginning.
|
|---|
| 1425 | */
|
|---|
| 1426 |
|
|---|
| 1427 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1428 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1429 | \brief the section's position in relation to the selected section
|
|---|
| 1430 |
|
|---|
| 1431 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::NotAdjacent
|
|---|
| 1432 | */
|
|---|
| 1433 |
|
|---|
| 1434 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1435 | \variable QStyleOptionHeader::sortIndicator
|
|---|
| 1436 | \brief the direction the sort indicator should be drawn
|
|---|
| 1437 |
|
|---|
| 1438 | The default value is QStyleOptionHeader::None.
|
|---|
| 1439 | */
|
|---|
| 1440 |
|
|---|
| 1441 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1442 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SectionPosition
|
|---|
| 1443 |
|
|---|
| 1444 | This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the other sections.
|
|---|
| 1445 |
|
|---|
| 1446 | \value Beginning At the beginining of the header
|
|---|
| 1447 | \value Middle In the middle of the header
|
|---|
| 1448 | \value End At the end of the header
|
|---|
| 1449 | \value OnlyOneSection Only one header section
|
|---|
| 1450 |
|
|---|
| 1451 | \sa position
|
|---|
| 1452 | */
|
|---|
| 1453 |
|
|---|
| 1454 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1455 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SelectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1456 |
|
|---|
| 1457 | This enum lets you know where the section's position is in relation to the selected section.
|
|---|
| 1458 |
|
|---|
| 1459 | \value NotAdjacent Not adjacent to the selected section
|
|---|
| 1460 | \value NextIsSelected The next section is selected
|
|---|
| 1461 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous section is selected
|
|---|
| 1462 | \value NextAndPreviousAreSelected Both the next and previous section are selected
|
|---|
| 1463 |
|
|---|
| 1464 | \sa selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1465 | */
|
|---|
| 1466 |
|
|---|
| 1467 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1468 | \enum QStyleOptionHeader::SortIndicator
|
|---|
| 1469 |
|
|---|
| 1470 | Indicates which direction the sort indicator should be drawn
|
|---|
| 1471 |
|
|---|
| 1472 | \value None No sort indicator is needed
|
|---|
| 1473 | \value SortUp Draw an up indicator
|
|---|
| 1474 | \value SortDown Draw a down indicator
|
|---|
| 1475 |
|
|---|
| 1476 | \sa sortIndicator
|
|---|
| 1477 | */
|
|---|
| 1478 |
|
|---|
| 1479 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1480 | \class QStyleOptionButton
|
|---|
| 1481 | \brief The QStyleOptionButton class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1482 | parameters for drawing buttons.
|
|---|
| 1483 |
|
|---|
| 1484 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 1485 | functions need to draw graphical elements like QPushButton,
|
|---|
| 1486 | QCheckBox, and QRadioButton.
|
|---|
| 1487 |
|
|---|
| 1488 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 1489 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 1490 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 1491 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 1492 |
|
|---|
| 1493 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 1494 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 1495 |
|
|---|
| 1496 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionToolButton
|
|---|
| 1497 | */
|
|---|
| 1498 |
|
|---|
| 1499 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1500 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::ButtonFeature
|
|---|
| 1501 |
|
|---|
| 1502 | This enum describes the different types of features a push button can have.
|
|---|
| 1503 |
|
|---|
| 1504 | \value None Indicates a normal push button.
|
|---|
| 1505 | \value Flat Indicates a flat push button.
|
|---|
| 1506 | \value HasMenu Indicates that the button has a drop down menu.
|
|---|
| 1507 | \value DefaultButton Indicates that the button is a default button.
|
|---|
| 1508 | \value AutoDefaultButton Indicates that the button is an auto default button.
|
|---|
| 1509 | \value CommandLinkButton Indicates that the button is a Windows Vista type command link.
|
|---|
| 1510 |
|
|---|
| 1511 | \sa features
|
|---|
| 1512 | */
|
|---|
| 1513 |
|
|---|
| 1514 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1515 | Constructs a QStyleOptionButton, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 1516 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 1517 | */
|
|---|
| 1518 |
|
|---|
| 1519 | QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton()
|
|---|
| 1520 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionButton::Version, SO_Button), features(None)
|
|---|
| 1521 | {
|
|---|
| 1522 | }
|
|---|
| 1523 |
|
|---|
| 1524 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1525 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1526 | */
|
|---|
| 1527 | QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton(int version)
|
|---|
| 1528 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Button), features(None)
|
|---|
| 1529 | {
|
|---|
| 1530 | }
|
|---|
| 1531 |
|
|---|
| 1532 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1533 | \fn QStyleOptionButton::QStyleOptionButton(const QStyleOptionButton &other)
|
|---|
| 1534 |
|
|---|
| 1535 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 1536 | */
|
|---|
| 1537 |
|
|---|
| 1538 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1539 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1540 |
|
|---|
| 1541 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1542 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1543 |
|
|---|
| 1544 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Button} for this class).
|
|---|
| 1545 |
|
|---|
| 1546 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 1547 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 1548 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 1549 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 1550 |
|
|---|
| 1551 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1552 | */
|
|---|
| 1553 |
|
|---|
| 1554 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1555 | \enum QStyleOptionButton::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1556 |
|
|---|
| 1557 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1558 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1559 |
|
|---|
| 1560 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 1561 |
|
|---|
| 1562 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1563 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1564 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1565 |
|
|---|
| 1566 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1567 | */
|
|---|
| 1568 |
|
|---|
| 1569 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1570 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::features
|
|---|
| 1571 | \brief a bitwise OR of the features that describe this button
|
|---|
| 1572 |
|
|---|
| 1573 | \sa ButtonFeature
|
|---|
| 1574 | */
|
|---|
| 1575 |
|
|---|
| 1576 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1577 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::text
|
|---|
| 1578 | \brief the text of the button
|
|---|
| 1579 |
|
|---|
| 1580 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 1581 | */
|
|---|
| 1582 |
|
|---|
| 1583 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1584 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::icon
|
|---|
| 1585 | \brief the icon of the button
|
|---|
| 1586 |
|
|---|
| 1587 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 1588 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 1589 |
|
|---|
| 1590 | \sa iconSize
|
|---|
| 1591 | */
|
|---|
| 1592 |
|
|---|
| 1593 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1594 | \variable QStyleOptionButton::iconSize
|
|---|
| 1595 | \brief the size of the icon for the button
|
|---|
| 1596 |
|
|---|
| 1597 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 1598 | */
|
|---|
| 1599 |
|
|---|
| 1600 |
|
|---|
| 1601 | #ifndef QT_NO_TOOLBAR
|
|---|
| 1602 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1603 | \class QStyleOptionToolBar
|
|---|
| 1604 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBar class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1605 | parameters for drawing a toolbar.
|
|---|
| 1606 |
|
|---|
| 1607 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 1608 |
|
|---|
| 1609 | QStyleOptionToolBar contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 1610 | functions need to draw QToolBar.
|
|---|
| 1611 |
|
|---|
| 1612 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 1613 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 1614 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 1615 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 1616 |
|
|---|
| 1617 | The QStyleOptionToolBar class holds the lineWidth and the
|
|---|
| 1618 | midLineWidth for drawing the widget. It also stores information
|
|---|
| 1619 | about which \l {toolBarArea}{area} the toolbar should be located
|
|---|
| 1620 | in, whether it is movable or not, which position the toolbar line
|
|---|
| 1621 | should have (positionOfLine), and the toolbar's position within
|
|---|
| 1622 | the line (positionWithinLine).
|
|---|
| 1623 |
|
|---|
| 1624 | In addition, the class provides a couple of enums: The
|
|---|
| 1625 | ToolBarFeature enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is
|
|---|
| 1626 | movable or not, and the ToolBarPosition enum is used to describe
|
|---|
| 1627 | the position of a toolbar line, as well as the toolbar's position
|
|---|
| 1628 | within the line.
|
|---|
| 1629 |
|
|---|
| 1630 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 1631 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 1632 |
|
|---|
| 1633 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1634 | */
|
|---|
| 1635 |
|
|---|
| 1636 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1637 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBar, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 1638 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 1639 | */
|
|---|
| 1640 |
|
|---|
| 1641 | QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar()
|
|---|
| 1642 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ToolBar), positionOfLine(OnlyOne), positionWithinLine(OnlyOne),
|
|---|
| 1643 | toolBarArea(Qt::TopToolBarArea), features(None), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 1644 | {
|
|---|
| 1645 | }
|
|---|
| 1646 |
|
|---|
| 1647 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1648 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar(const QStyleOptionToolBar &other)
|
|---|
| 1649 |
|
|---|
| 1650 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 1651 | */
|
|---|
| 1652 |
|
|---|
| 1653 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1654 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1655 | */
|
|---|
| 1656 | QStyleOptionToolBar::QStyleOptionToolBar(int version)
|
|---|
| 1657 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ToolBar), positionOfLine(OnlyOne), positionWithinLine(OnlyOne),
|
|---|
| 1658 | toolBarArea(Qt::TopToolBarArea), features(None), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 1659 | {
|
|---|
| 1660 |
|
|---|
| 1661 | }
|
|---|
| 1662 |
|
|---|
| 1663 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1664 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::ToolBarPosition
|
|---|
| 1665 |
|
|---|
| 1666 | \image qstyleoptiontoolbar-position.png
|
|---|
| 1667 |
|
|---|
| 1668 | This enum is used to describe the position of a toolbar line, as
|
|---|
| 1669 | well as the toolbar's position within the line.
|
|---|
| 1670 |
|
|---|
| 1671 | The order of the positions within a line starts at the top of a
|
|---|
| 1672 | vertical line, and from the left within a horizontal line. The
|
|---|
| 1673 | order of the positions for the lines is always from the the
|
|---|
| 1674 | parent widget's boundary edges.
|
|---|
| 1675 |
|
|---|
| 1676 | \value Beginning The toolbar is located at the beginning of the line,
|
|---|
| 1677 | or the toolbar line is the first of several lines. There can
|
|---|
| 1678 | only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position.
|
|---|
| 1679 | \value Middle The toolbar is located in the middle of the line,
|
|---|
| 1680 | or the toolbar line is in the middle of several lines. There can
|
|---|
| 1681 | several toolbars (and lines) with this position.
|
|---|
| 1682 | \value End The toolbar is located at the end of the line,
|
|---|
| 1683 | or the toolbar line is the last of several lines. There can
|
|---|
| 1684 | only be one toolbar (and only one line) with this position.
|
|---|
| 1685 | \value OnlyOne There is only one toolbar or line. This is the default value
|
|---|
| 1686 | of the positionOfLine and positionWithinLine variables.
|
|---|
| 1687 |
|
|---|
| 1688 | \sa positionWithinLine, positionOfLine
|
|---|
| 1689 | */
|
|---|
| 1690 |
|
|---|
| 1691 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1692 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::ToolBarFeature
|
|---|
| 1693 |
|
|---|
| 1694 | This enum is used to describe whether a toolbar is movable or not.
|
|---|
| 1695 |
|
|---|
| 1696 | \value None The toolbar cannot be moved. The default value.
|
|---|
| 1697 | \value Movable The toolbar is movable, and a handle will appear when
|
|---|
| 1698 | holding the cursor over the toolbar's boundary.
|
|---|
| 1699 |
|
|---|
| 1700 | \sa features, QToolBar::isMovable()
|
|---|
| 1701 | */
|
|---|
| 1702 |
|
|---|
| 1703 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1704 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::positionOfLine
|
|---|
| 1705 |
|
|---|
| 1706 | This variable holds the position of the toolbar line.
|
|---|
| 1707 |
|
|---|
| 1708 | The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne.
|
|---|
| 1709 | */
|
|---|
| 1710 |
|
|---|
| 1711 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1712 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::positionWithinLine
|
|---|
| 1713 |
|
|---|
| 1714 | This variable holds the position of the toolbar within a line.
|
|---|
| 1715 |
|
|---|
| 1716 | The default value is QStyleOptionToolBar::OnlyOne.
|
|---|
| 1717 | */
|
|---|
| 1718 |
|
|---|
| 1719 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1720 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::toolBarArea
|
|---|
| 1721 |
|
|---|
| 1722 | This variable holds the location for drawing the toolbar.
|
|---|
| 1723 |
|
|---|
| 1724 | The default value is Qt::TopToolBarArea.
|
|---|
| 1725 |
|
|---|
| 1726 | \sa Qt::ToolBarArea
|
|---|
| 1727 | */
|
|---|
| 1728 |
|
|---|
| 1729 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1730 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::features
|
|---|
| 1731 |
|
|---|
| 1732 | This variable holds whether the toolbar is movable or not.
|
|---|
| 1733 |
|
|---|
| 1734 | The default value is \l None.
|
|---|
| 1735 | */
|
|---|
| 1736 |
|
|---|
| 1737 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1738 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 1739 |
|
|---|
| 1740 | This variable holds the line width for drawing the toolbar.
|
|---|
| 1741 |
|
|---|
| 1742 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 1743 | */
|
|---|
| 1744 |
|
|---|
| 1745 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1746 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBar::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 1747 |
|
|---|
| 1748 | This variable holds the mid-line width for drawing the toolbar.
|
|---|
| 1749 |
|
|---|
| 1750 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 1751 | */
|
|---|
| 1752 |
|
|---|
| 1753 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1754 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1755 |
|
|---|
| 1756 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style
|
|---|
| 1757 | option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1758 |
|
|---|
| 1759 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolBar} for
|
|---|
| 1760 | this class).
|
|---|
| 1761 |
|
|---|
| 1762 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 1763 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 1764 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 1765 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 1766 |
|
|---|
| 1767 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1768 | */
|
|---|
| 1769 |
|
|---|
| 1770 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1771 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBar::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1772 |
|
|---|
| 1773 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the
|
|---|
| 1774 | style option, and is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1775 |
|
|---|
| 1776 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 1777 |
|
|---|
| 1778 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1779 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1780 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1781 |
|
|---|
| 1782 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1783 | */
|
|---|
| 1784 |
|
|---|
| 1785 | #endif
|
|---|
| 1786 |
|
|---|
| 1787 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABBAR
|
|---|
| 1788 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1789 | \class QStyleOptionTab
|
|---|
| 1790 | \brief The QStyleOptionTab class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1791 | parameters for drawing a tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1792 |
|
|---|
| 1793 | The QStyleOptionTab class is used for drawing several built-in Qt
|
|---|
| 1794 | widgets including \l QTabBar and the panel for \l QTabWidget. Note
|
|---|
| 1795 | that to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in
|
|---|
| 1796 | Qt 4.1 or above, you must use the QStyleOptionFrameV2 subclass.
|
|---|
| 1797 |
|
|---|
| 1798 | An instance of the QStyleOptiontabV2 class has
|
|---|
| 1799 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and
|
|---|
| 1800 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 1. The type is used internally
|
|---|
| 1801 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to
|
|---|
| 1802 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to
|
|---|
| 1803 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1804 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1805 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 1806 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not
|
|---|
| 1807 | need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1808 |
|
|---|
| 1809 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 1810 | QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2.
|
|---|
| 1811 |
|
|---|
| 1812 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 1813 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 1814 |
|
|---|
| 1815 | \sa QStyleOptionTabV2, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1816 | */
|
|---|
| 1817 |
|
|---|
| 1818 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1819 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTab object, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 1820 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 1821 | */
|
|---|
| 1822 |
|
|---|
| 1823 | QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab()
|
|---|
| 1824 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionTab::Version, SO_Tab),
|
|---|
| 1825 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth),
|
|---|
| 1826 | row(0),
|
|---|
| 1827 | position(Beginning),
|
|---|
| 1828 | selectedPosition(NotAdjacent), cornerWidgets(QStyleOptionTab::NoCornerWidgets)
|
|---|
| 1829 | {
|
|---|
| 1830 | }
|
|---|
| 1831 |
|
|---|
| 1832 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1833 | \internal
|
|---|
| 1834 | */
|
|---|
| 1835 | QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab(int version)
|
|---|
| 1836 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Tab),
|
|---|
| 1837 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth),
|
|---|
| 1838 | row(0),
|
|---|
| 1839 | position(Beginning),
|
|---|
| 1840 | selectedPosition(NotAdjacent), cornerWidgets(QStyleOptionTab::NoCornerWidgets)
|
|---|
| 1841 | {
|
|---|
| 1842 | }
|
|---|
| 1843 |
|
|---|
| 1844 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1845 | \fn QStyleOptionTab::QStyleOptionTab(const QStyleOptionTab &other)
|
|---|
| 1846 |
|
|---|
| 1847 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 1848 | */
|
|---|
| 1849 |
|
|---|
| 1850 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1851 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1852 |
|
|---|
| 1853 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1854 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1855 |
|
|---|
| 1856 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Tab} for this class).
|
|---|
| 1857 |
|
|---|
| 1858 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 1859 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 1860 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 1861 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 1862 |
|
|---|
| 1863 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1864 | */
|
|---|
| 1865 |
|
|---|
| 1866 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1867 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 1868 |
|
|---|
| 1869 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 1870 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 1871 |
|
|---|
| 1872 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 1873 |
|
|---|
| 1874 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 1875 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 1876 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1877 |
|
|---|
| 1878 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 1879 | */
|
|---|
| 1880 |
|
|---|
| 1881 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1882 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::TabPosition
|
|---|
| 1883 |
|
|---|
| 1884 | This enum describes the position of the tab.
|
|---|
| 1885 |
|
|---|
| 1886 | \value Beginning The tab is the first tab in the tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1887 | \value Middle The tab is neither the first nor the last tab in the tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1888 | \value End The tab is the last tab in the tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1889 | \value OnlyOneTab The tab is both the first and the last tab in the tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1890 |
|
|---|
| 1891 | \sa position
|
|---|
| 1892 | */
|
|---|
| 1893 |
|
|---|
| 1894 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1895 | \enum QStyleOptionTab::CornerWidget
|
|---|
| 1896 |
|
|---|
| 1897 | These flags indicate the corner widgets in a tab.
|
|---|
| 1898 |
|
|---|
| 1899 | \value NoCornerWidgets There are no corner widgets
|
|---|
| 1900 | \value LeftCornerWidget Left corner widget
|
|---|
| 1901 | \value RightCornerWidget Right corner widget
|
|---|
| 1902 |
|
|---|
| 1903 | \sa cornerWidgets
|
|---|
| 1904 | */
|
|---|
| 1905 |
|
|---|
| 1906 | /*! \enum QStyleOptionTab::SelectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1907 |
|
|---|
| 1908 | This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles
|
|---|
| 1909 | need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is
|
|---|
| 1910 | adjacent to the selected tab.
|
|---|
| 1911 |
|
|---|
| 1912 | \value NotAdjacent The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab).
|
|---|
| 1913 | \value NextIsSelected The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected.
|
|---|
| 1914 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected.
|
|---|
| 1915 |
|
|---|
| 1916 | \sa selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1917 | */
|
|---|
| 1918 |
|
|---|
| 1919 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1920 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 1921 | \brief the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab
|
|---|
| 1922 |
|
|---|
| 1923 | The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to
|
|---|
| 1924 | a selected tab nor is it the selected tab.
|
|---|
| 1925 | */
|
|---|
| 1926 |
|
|---|
| 1927 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1928 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::cornerWidgets
|
|---|
| 1929 | \brief an OR combination of CornerWidget values indicating the
|
|---|
| 1930 | corner widgets of the tab bar
|
|---|
| 1931 |
|
|---|
| 1932 | The default value is NoCornerWidgets.
|
|---|
| 1933 |
|
|---|
| 1934 | \sa CornerWidget
|
|---|
| 1935 | */
|
|---|
| 1936 |
|
|---|
| 1937 |
|
|---|
| 1938 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1939 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::shape
|
|---|
| 1940 | \brief the tab shape used to draw the tab; by default
|
|---|
| 1941 | QTabBar::RoundedNorth
|
|---|
| 1942 |
|
|---|
| 1943 | \sa QTabBar::Shape
|
|---|
| 1944 | */
|
|---|
| 1945 |
|
|---|
| 1946 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1947 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::text
|
|---|
| 1948 | \brief the text of the tab
|
|---|
| 1949 |
|
|---|
| 1950 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 1951 | */
|
|---|
| 1952 |
|
|---|
| 1953 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1954 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::icon
|
|---|
| 1955 | \brief the icon for the tab
|
|---|
| 1956 |
|
|---|
| 1957 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 1958 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 1959 | */
|
|---|
| 1960 |
|
|---|
| 1961 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1962 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::row
|
|---|
| 1963 | \brief which row the tab is currently in
|
|---|
| 1964 |
|
|---|
| 1965 | The default value is 0, indicating the front row. Currently this
|
|---|
| 1966 | property can only be 0.
|
|---|
| 1967 | */
|
|---|
| 1968 |
|
|---|
| 1969 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1970 | \variable QStyleOptionTab::position
|
|---|
| 1971 | \brief the position of the tab in the tab bar
|
|---|
| 1972 |
|
|---|
| 1973 | The default value is \l Beginning, i.e. the tab is the first tab
|
|---|
| 1974 | in the tab bar.
|
|---|
| 1975 | */
|
|---|
| 1976 |
|
|---|
| 1977 | /*!
|
|---|
| 1978 | \class QStyleOptionTabV2
|
|---|
| 1979 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabV2 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 1980 | parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.1 or above.
|
|---|
| 1981 |
|
|---|
| 1982 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 1983 |
|
|---|
| 1984 | An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV2 class has
|
|---|
| 1985 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and
|
|---|
| 1986 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used internally
|
|---|
| 1987 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to
|
|---|
| 1988 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to
|
|---|
| 1989 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1990 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 1991 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 1992 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not
|
|---|
| 1993 | need to check it.
|
|---|
| 1994 |
|
|---|
| 1995 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 1996 | QStyleOptionTab and QStyleOptionTabV2. One way to achieve this is
|
|---|
| 1997 | to use the QStyleOptionTabV2 copy constructor. For example:
|
|---|
| 1998 |
|
|---|
| 1999 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 3
|
|---|
| 2000 |
|
|---|
| 2001 | In the example above: If \c tabOption's version is 1, the extra
|
|---|
| 2002 | member (\l iconSize) will be set to an invalid size for \c tabV2.
|
|---|
| 2003 | If \c tabOption's version is 2, the constructor will simply copy
|
|---|
| 2004 | the \c tab's iconSize.
|
|---|
| 2005 |
|
|---|
| 2006 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2007 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2008 |
|
|---|
| 2009 | \sa QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2010 | */
|
|---|
| 2011 |
|
|---|
| 2012 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2013 | \enum QStyleOptionTabV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2014 |
|
|---|
| 2015 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2016 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2017 |
|
|---|
| 2018 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 2019 |
|
|---|
| 2020 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2021 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2022 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2023 |
|
|---|
| 2024 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2025 | */
|
|---|
| 2026 |
|
|---|
| 2027 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2028 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV2::iconSize
|
|---|
| 2029 | \brief the size for the icons
|
|---|
| 2030 |
|
|---|
| 2031 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size; use
|
|---|
| 2032 | QStyle::pixelMetric() to find the default icon size for tab bars.
|
|---|
| 2033 |
|
|---|
| 2034 | \sa QTabBar::iconSize()
|
|---|
| 2035 | */
|
|---|
| 2036 |
|
|---|
| 2037 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2038 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2.
|
|---|
| 2039 | */
|
|---|
| 2040 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2()
|
|---|
| 2041 | : QStyleOptionTab(Version)
|
|---|
| 2042 | {
|
|---|
| 2043 | }
|
|---|
| 2044 |
|
|---|
| 2045 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2046 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2047 | */
|
|---|
| 2048 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 2049 | : QStyleOptionTab(version)
|
|---|
| 2050 | {
|
|---|
| 2051 | }
|
|---|
| 2052 |
|
|---|
| 2053 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2054 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(const QStyleOptionTabV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 2055 |
|
|---|
| 2056 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2057 | */
|
|---|
| 2058 |
|
|---|
| 2059 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2060 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV2 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 2061 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab
|
|---|
| 2062 | types.
|
|---|
| 2063 |
|
|---|
| 2064 | If the other style option's version is 1, the new style option's
|
|---|
| 2065 | \c iconSize is set to an invalid value. If its version is 2, its
|
|---|
| 2066 | \c iconSize value is simply copied to the new style option.
|
|---|
| 2067 | */
|
|---|
| 2068 | QStyleOptionTabV2::QStyleOptionTabV2(const QStyleOptionTab &other)
|
|---|
| 2069 | : QStyleOptionTab(Version)
|
|---|
| 2070 | {
|
|---|
| 2071 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV2 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV2 *>(&other)) {
|
|---|
| 2072 | *this = *tab;
|
|---|
| 2073 | } else {
|
|---|
| 2074 | *((QStyleOptionTab *)this) = other;
|
|---|
| 2075 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 2076 | }
|
|---|
| 2077 | }
|
|---|
| 2078 |
|
|---|
| 2079 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2080 | Assigns the \a other style option to this QStyleOptionTabV2. The
|
|---|
| 2081 | \a other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV2 or
|
|---|
| 2082 | QStyleOptionTab types.
|
|---|
| 2083 |
|
|---|
| 2084 | If the other style option's version is 1, this style option's \c
|
|---|
| 2085 | iconSize is set to an invalid size. If its version is 2, its \c
|
|---|
| 2086 | iconSize value is simply copied to this style option.
|
|---|
| 2087 | */
|
|---|
| 2088 | QStyleOptionTabV2 &QStyleOptionTabV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionTab &other)
|
|---|
| 2089 | {
|
|---|
| 2090 | QStyleOptionTab::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 2091 |
|
|---|
| 2092 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV2 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV2 *>(&other))
|
|---|
| 2093 | iconSize = tab->iconSize;
|
|---|
| 2094 | else
|
|---|
| 2095 | iconSize = QSize();
|
|---|
| 2096 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 2097 | }
|
|---|
| 2098 |
|
|---|
| 2099 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2100 | \class QStyleOptionTabV3
|
|---|
| 2101 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabV3 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 2102 | parameters necessary for drawing a tabs in Qt 4.5 or above.
|
|---|
| 2103 |
|
|---|
| 2104 | \since 4.5
|
|---|
| 2105 |
|
|---|
| 2106 | An instance of the QStyleOptionTabV3 class has
|
|---|
| 2107 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} \l SO_Tab and
|
|---|
| 2108 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 3. The type is used internally
|
|---|
| 2109 | by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and qstyleoption_cast() to
|
|---|
| 2110 | determine the type of style option. In general you do not need to
|
|---|
| 2111 | worry about this unless you want to create your own QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2112 | subclass and your own styles. The version is used by QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2113 | subclasses to implement extensions without breaking
|
|---|
| 2114 | compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not
|
|---|
| 2115 | need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2116 |
|
|---|
| 2117 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 2118 | QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOptionTabV2 and QStyleOptionTabV3.
|
|---|
| 2119 | One way to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionTabV3 copy
|
|---|
| 2120 | constructor. For example:
|
|---|
| 2121 |
|
|---|
| 2122 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 3
|
|---|
| 2123 |
|
|---|
| 2124 | In the example above: If \c tabOption's version is 1, the extra
|
|---|
| 2125 | member (\l{QStyleOptionTabV2::iconSize}{iconSize}) will be set to
|
|---|
| 2126 | an invalid size for \c tabV2. If \c tabOption's version is 2, the
|
|---|
| 2127 | constructor will simply copy the \c tab's iconSize.
|
|---|
| 2128 |
|
|---|
| 2129 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2130 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2131 |
|
|---|
| 2132 | \sa QStyleOptionTab, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2133 | */
|
|---|
| 2134 |
|
|---|
| 2135 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2136 | \enum QStyleOptionTabV3::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2137 |
|
|---|
| 2138 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2139 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2140 |
|
|---|
| 2141 | \value Version 3
|
|---|
| 2142 |
|
|---|
| 2143 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2144 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2145 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2146 |
|
|---|
| 2147 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2148 | */
|
|---|
| 2149 |
|
|---|
| 2150 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2151 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::documentMode
|
|---|
| 2152 | \brief whether the tabbar is in document mode.
|
|---|
| 2153 |
|
|---|
| 2154 | The default value is false;
|
|---|
| 2155 | */
|
|---|
| 2156 |
|
|---|
| 2157 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2158 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::leftButtonSize
|
|---|
| 2159 | \brief the size for the left widget on the tab.
|
|---|
| 2160 |
|
|---|
| 2161 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size;
|
|---|
| 2162 | */
|
|---|
| 2163 |
|
|---|
| 2164 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2165 | \variable QStyleOptionTabV3::rightButtonSize
|
|---|
| 2166 | \brief the size for the right widget on the tab.
|
|---|
| 2167 |
|
|---|
| 2168 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size;
|
|---|
| 2169 | */
|
|---|
| 2170 |
|
|---|
| 2171 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2172 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3.
|
|---|
| 2173 | */
|
|---|
| 2174 |
|
|---|
| 2175 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3()
|
|---|
| 2176 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(Version)
|
|---|
| 2177 | , documentMode(false)
|
|---|
| 2178 | {
|
|---|
| 2179 | }
|
|---|
| 2180 |
|
|---|
| 2181 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2182 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2183 | */
|
|---|
| 2184 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(int version)
|
|---|
| 2185 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(version)
|
|---|
| 2186 | {
|
|---|
| 2187 | }
|
|---|
| 2188 |
|
|---|
| 2189 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2190 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTabV3 &other)
|
|---|
| 2191 |
|
|---|
| 2192 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2193 | */
|
|---|
| 2194 |
|
|---|
| 2195 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2196 | \fn QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTabV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 2197 |
|
|---|
| 2198 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2199 | */
|
|---|
| 2200 |
|
|---|
| 2201 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2202 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabV3 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 2203 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV3, QStyleOptionTabV2
|
|---|
| 2204 | or QStyleOptionTab types.
|
|---|
| 2205 |
|
|---|
| 2206 | If the other style option's version is 1 or 2, the new style option's
|
|---|
| 2207 | \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize is set to an invalid value. If
|
|---|
| 2208 | its version is 3, its \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize values
|
|---|
| 2209 | are simply copied to the new style option.
|
|---|
| 2210 | */
|
|---|
| 2211 | QStyleOptionTabV3::QStyleOptionTabV3(const QStyleOptionTab &other)
|
|---|
| 2212 | : QStyleOptionTabV2(Version)
|
|---|
| 2213 | {
|
|---|
| 2214 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV3 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV3 *>(&other)) {
|
|---|
| 2215 | *this = *tab;
|
|---|
| 2216 | } else {
|
|---|
| 2217 | *((QStyleOptionTabV2 *)this) = other;
|
|---|
| 2218 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 2219 | }
|
|---|
| 2220 | }
|
|---|
| 2221 |
|
|---|
| 2222 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2223 | Assigns the \a other style option to this QStyleOptionTabV3. The
|
|---|
| 2224 | \a other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionTabV3,
|
|---|
| 2225 | QStyleOptionTabV2 or QStyleOptionTab types.
|
|---|
| 2226 |
|
|---|
| 2227 | If the other style option's version is 1 or 2, the new style option's
|
|---|
| 2228 | \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize is set to an invalid value. If
|
|---|
| 2229 | its version is 3, its \c leftButtonSize and \c rightButtonSize values
|
|---|
| 2230 | are simply copied to the new style option.
|
|---|
| 2231 | */
|
|---|
| 2232 | QStyleOptionTabV3 &QStyleOptionTabV3::operator=(const QStyleOptionTab &other)
|
|---|
| 2233 | {
|
|---|
| 2234 | QStyleOptionTabV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 2235 |
|
|---|
| 2236 | if (const QStyleOptionTabV3 *tab = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabV3 *>(&other)) {
|
|---|
| 2237 | leftButtonSize = tab->leftButtonSize;
|
|---|
| 2238 | rightButtonSize = tab->rightButtonSize;
|
|---|
| 2239 | } else {
|
|---|
| 2240 | leftButtonSize = QSize();
|
|---|
| 2241 | rightButtonSize = QSize();
|
|---|
| 2242 | documentMode = false;
|
|---|
| 2243 | }
|
|---|
| 2244 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 2245 | }
|
|---|
| 2246 |
|
|---|
| 2247 | #endif // QT_NO_TABBAR
|
|---|
| 2248 |
|
|---|
| 2249 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2250 | \class QStyleOptionProgressBar
|
|---|
| 2251 | \brief The QStyleOptionProgressBar class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 2252 | parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar.
|
|---|
| 2253 |
|
|---|
| 2254 | Since Qt 4.1, Qt uses the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 subclass for
|
|---|
| 2255 | drawing QProgressBar.
|
|---|
| 2256 |
|
|---|
| 2257 | An instance of the QStyleOptionProgressBar class has type
|
|---|
| 2258 | SO_ProgressBar and version 1.
|
|---|
| 2259 |
|
|---|
| 2260 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2261 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2262 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2263 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 2264 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 2265 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 2266 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2267 |
|
|---|
| 2268 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 2269 | QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.
|
|---|
| 2270 |
|
|---|
| 2271 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2272 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2273 |
|
|---|
| 2274 | \sa QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2275 | */
|
|---|
| 2276 |
|
|---|
| 2277 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2278 | Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBar, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 2279 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 2280 | */
|
|---|
| 2281 |
|
|---|
| 2282 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar()
|
|---|
| 2283 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionProgressBar::Version, SO_ProgressBar),
|
|---|
| 2284 | minimum(0), maximum(0), progress(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), textVisible(false)
|
|---|
| 2285 | {
|
|---|
| 2286 | }
|
|---|
| 2287 |
|
|---|
| 2288 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2289 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2290 | */
|
|---|
| 2291 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar(int version)
|
|---|
| 2292 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ProgressBar),
|
|---|
| 2293 | minimum(0), maximum(0), progress(0), textAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), textVisible(false)
|
|---|
| 2294 | {
|
|---|
| 2295 | }
|
|---|
| 2296 |
|
|---|
| 2297 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2298 | \fn QStyleOptionProgressBar::QStyleOptionProgressBar(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other)
|
|---|
| 2299 |
|
|---|
| 2300 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2301 | */
|
|---|
| 2302 |
|
|---|
| 2303 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2304 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBar::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2305 |
|
|---|
| 2306 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2307 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2308 |
|
|---|
| 2309 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ProgressBar} for this class).
|
|---|
| 2310 |
|
|---|
| 2311 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2312 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2313 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2314 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 2315 |
|
|---|
| 2316 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2317 | */
|
|---|
| 2318 |
|
|---|
| 2319 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2320 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBar::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2321 |
|
|---|
| 2322 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2323 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2324 |
|
|---|
| 2325 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 2326 |
|
|---|
| 2327 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2328 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2329 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2330 |
|
|---|
| 2331 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2332 | */
|
|---|
| 2333 |
|
|---|
| 2334 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2335 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::minimum
|
|---|
| 2336 | \brief the minimum value for the progress bar
|
|---|
| 2337 |
|
|---|
| 2338 | This is the minimum value in the progress bar. The default value
|
|---|
| 2339 | is 0.
|
|---|
| 2340 |
|
|---|
| 2341 | \sa QProgressBar::minimum
|
|---|
| 2342 | */
|
|---|
| 2343 |
|
|---|
| 2344 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2345 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::maximum
|
|---|
| 2346 | \brief the maximum value for the progress bar
|
|---|
| 2347 |
|
|---|
| 2348 | This is the maximum value in the progress bar. The default value
|
|---|
| 2349 | is 0.
|
|---|
| 2350 |
|
|---|
| 2351 | \sa QProgressBar::maximum
|
|---|
| 2352 | */
|
|---|
| 2353 |
|
|---|
| 2354 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2355 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::text
|
|---|
| 2356 | \brief the text for the progress bar
|
|---|
| 2357 |
|
|---|
| 2358 | The progress bar text is usually just the progress expressed as a
|
|---|
| 2359 | string. An empty string indicates that the progress bar has not
|
|---|
| 2360 | started yet. The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 2361 |
|
|---|
| 2362 | \sa QProgressBar::text
|
|---|
| 2363 | */
|
|---|
| 2364 |
|
|---|
| 2365 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2366 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::textVisible
|
|---|
| 2367 | \brief a flag indicating whether or not text is visible
|
|---|
| 2368 |
|
|---|
| 2369 | If this flag is true then the text is visible. Otherwise, the text
|
|---|
| 2370 | is not visible. The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 2371 |
|
|---|
| 2372 | \sa QProgressBar::textVisible
|
|---|
| 2373 | */
|
|---|
| 2374 |
|
|---|
| 2375 |
|
|---|
| 2376 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2377 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::textAlignment
|
|---|
| 2378 | \brief the text alignment for the text in the QProgressBar
|
|---|
| 2379 |
|
|---|
| 2380 | This can be used as a guide on where the text should be in the
|
|---|
| 2381 | progress bar. The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 2382 | */
|
|---|
| 2383 |
|
|---|
| 2384 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2385 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBar::progress
|
|---|
| 2386 | \brief the current progress for the progress bar
|
|---|
| 2387 |
|
|---|
| 2388 | The current progress. A value of QStyleOptionProgressBar::minimum
|
|---|
| 2389 | - 1 indicates that the progress hasn't started yet. The default
|
|---|
| 2390 | value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2391 |
|
|---|
| 2392 | \sa QProgressBar::value
|
|---|
| 2393 | */
|
|---|
| 2394 |
|
|---|
| 2395 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2396 | \class QStyleOptionProgressBarV2
|
|---|
| 2397 | \brief The QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 2398 | parameters necessary for drawing a progress bar in Qt 4.1 or above.
|
|---|
| 2399 |
|
|---|
| 2400 | \since 4.1
|
|---|
| 2401 |
|
|---|
| 2402 | An instance of this class has \l{QStyleOption::type} {type}
|
|---|
| 2403 | SO_ProgressBar and \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2.
|
|---|
| 2404 |
|
|---|
| 2405 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2406 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2407 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2408 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 2409 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 2410 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 2411 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2412 |
|
|---|
| 2413 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 2414 | QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2. One way
|
|---|
| 2415 | to achieve this is to use the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 copy
|
|---|
| 2416 | constructor. For example:
|
|---|
| 2417 |
|
|---|
| 2418 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 2
|
|---|
| 2419 |
|
|---|
| 2420 | In the example above: If the \c progressBarOption's version is 1,
|
|---|
| 2421 | the extra members (\l orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l
|
|---|
| 2422 | bottomToTop) are set to default values for \c progressBarV2. If
|
|---|
| 2423 | the \c progressBarOption's version is 2, the constructor will
|
|---|
| 2424 | simply copy the extra members to progressBarV2.
|
|---|
| 2425 |
|
|---|
| 2426 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2427 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2428 |
|
|---|
| 2429 | \sa QStyleOptionProgressBar, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2430 | */
|
|---|
| 2431 |
|
|---|
| 2432 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2433 | Constructs a QStyleOptionProgressBarV2, initializing he members
|
|---|
| 2434 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 2435 | */
|
|---|
| 2436 |
|
|---|
| 2437 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2()
|
|---|
| 2438 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2),
|
|---|
| 2439 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false)
|
|---|
| 2440 | {
|
|---|
| 2441 | }
|
|---|
| 2442 |
|
|---|
| 2443 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2444 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2445 | */
|
|---|
| 2446 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 2447 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(version),
|
|---|
| 2448 | orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false)
|
|---|
| 2449 | {
|
|---|
| 2450 | }
|
|---|
| 2451 |
|
|---|
| 2452 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2453 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option which can be either
|
|---|
| 2454 | of the QStyleOptionProgressBar and QStyleOptionProgressBarV2
|
|---|
| 2455 | types.
|
|---|
| 2456 |
|
|---|
| 2457 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, the extra members (\l
|
|---|
| 2458 | orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l bottomToTop) are set
|
|---|
| 2459 | to default values for the new style option. If \a{other}'s version
|
|---|
| 2460 | is 2, the extra members are simply copied.
|
|---|
| 2461 |
|
|---|
| 2462 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 2463 | */
|
|---|
| 2464 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other)
|
|---|
| 2465 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false)
|
|---|
| 2466 | {
|
|---|
| 2467 | const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *pb2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 2468 | if (pb2)
|
|---|
| 2469 | *this = *pb2;
|
|---|
| 2470 | else
|
|---|
| 2471 | *((QStyleOptionProgressBar *)this) = other;
|
|---|
| 2472 | }
|
|---|
| 2473 |
|
|---|
| 2474 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2475 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2476 | */
|
|---|
| 2477 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::QStyleOptionProgressBarV2(const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 2478 | : QStyleOptionProgressBar(2), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), invertedAppearance(false), bottomToTop(false)
|
|---|
| 2479 | {
|
|---|
| 2480 | *this = other;
|
|---|
| 2481 | }
|
|---|
| 2482 |
|
|---|
| 2483 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2484 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 2485 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionProgressBarV2
|
|---|
| 2486 | or QStyleOptionProgressBar types.
|
|---|
| 2487 |
|
|---|
| 2488 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, the extra members
|
|---|
| 2489 | (\l orientation, \l invertedAppearance, and \l bottomToTop) are
|
|---|
| 2490 | set to default values for this style option. If \a{other}'s
|
|---|
| 2491 | version is 2, the extra members are simply copied to this style
|
|---|
| 2492 | option.
|
|---|
| 2493 | */
|
|---|
| 2494 | QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 &QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionProgressBar &other)
|
|---|
| 2495 | {
|
|---|
| 2496 | QStyleOptionProgressBar::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 2497 |
|
|---|
| 2498 | const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *pb2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionProgressBarV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 2499 | orientation = pb2 ? pb2->orientation : Qt::Horizontal;
|
|---|
| 2500 | invertedAppearance = pb2 ? pb2->invertedAppearance : false;
|
|---|
| 2501 | bottomToTop = pb2 ? pb2->bottomToTop : false;
|
|---|
| 2502 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 2503 | }
|
|---|
| 2504 |
|
|---|
| 2505 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2506 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::orientation
|
|---|
| 2507 | \brief the progress bar's orientation (horizontal or vertical);
|
|---|
| 2508 | the default orentation is Qt::Horizontal
|
|---|
| 2509 |
|
|---|
| 2510 | \sa QProgressBar::orientation
|
|---|
| 2511 | */
|
|---|
| 2512 |
|
|---|
| 2513 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2514 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::invertedAppearance
|
|---|
| 2515 | \brief whether the progress bar's appearance is inverted
|
|---|
| 2516 |
|
|---|
| 2517 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 2518 |
|
|---|
| 2519 | \sa QProgressBar::invertedAppearance
|
|---|
| 2520 | */
|
|---|
| 2521 |
|
|---|
| 2522 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2523 | \variable QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::bottomToTop
|
|---|
| 2524 | \brief whether the text reads from bottom to top when the progress
|
|---|
| 2525 | bar is vertical
|
|---|
| 2526 |
|
|---|
| 2527 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 2528 |
|
|---|
| 2529 | \sa QProgressBar::textDirection
|
|---|
| 2530 | */
|
|---|
| 2531 |
|
|---|
| 2532 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2533 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2534 |
|
|---|
| 2535 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2536 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2537 |
|
|---|
| 2538 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ProgressBar} for this class).
|
|---|
| 2539 |
|
|---|
| 2540 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2541 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2542 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2543 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 2544 |
|
|---|
| 2545 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2546 | */
|
|---|
| 2547 |
|
|---|
| 2548 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2549 | \enum QStyleOptionProgressBarV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2550 |
|
|---|
| 2551 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2552 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2553 |
|
|---|
| 2554 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 2555 |
|
|---|
| 2556 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2557 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2558 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2559 |
|
|---|
| 2560 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2561 | */
|
|---|
| 2562 |
|
|---|
| 2563 |
|
|---|
| 2564 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2565 | \class QStyleOptionMenuItem
|
|---|
| 2566 | \brief The QStyleOptionMenuItem class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 2567 | parameter necessary for drawing a menu item.
|
|---|
| 2568 |
|
|---|
| 2569 | QStyleOptionMenuItem contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 2570 | functions need to draw the menu items from \l QMenu. It is also
|
|---|
| 2571 | used for drawing other menu-related widgets.
|
|---|
| 2572 |
|
|---|
| 2573 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 2574 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 2575 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 2576 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 2577 |
|
|---|
| 2578 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2579 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2580 |
|
|---|
| 2581 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2582 | */
|
|---|
| 2583 |
|
|---|
| 2584 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2585 | Constructs a QStyleOptionMenuItem, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 2586 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 2587 | */
|
|---|
| 2588 |
|
|---|
| 2589 | QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem()
|
|---|
| 2590 | : QStyleOption(QStyleOptionMenuItem::Version, SO_MenuItem), menuItemType(Normal),
|
|---|
| 2591 | checkType(NotCheckable), checked(false), menuHasCheckableItems(true), maxIconWidth(0), tabWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 2592 | {
|
|---|
| 2593 | }
|
|---|
| 2594 |
|
|---|
| 2595 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2596 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2597 | */
|
|---|
| 2598 | QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem(int version)
|
|---|
| 2599 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_MenuItem), menuItemType(Normal),
|
|---|
| 2600 | checkType(NotCheckable), checked(false), menuHasCheckableItems(true), maxIconWidth(0), tabWidth(0)
|
|---|
| 2601 | {
|
|---|
| 2602 | }
|
|---|
| 2603 |
|
|---|
| 2604 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2605 | \fn QStyleOptionMenuItem::QStyleOptionMenuItem(const QStyleOptionMenuItem &other)
|
|---|
| 2606 |
|
|---|
| 2607 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2608 | */
|
|---|
| 2609 |
|
|---|
| 2610 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2611 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2612 |
|
|---|
| 2613 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2614 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2615 |
|
|---|
| 2616 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_MenuItem} for this class).
|
|---|
| 2617 |
|
|---|
| 2618 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2619 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2620 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2621 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 2622 |
|
|---|
| 2623 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2624 | */
|
|---|
| 2625 |
|
|---|
| 2626 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2627 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2628 |
|
|---|
| 2629 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2630 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2631 |
|
|---|
| 2632 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 2633 |
|
|---|
| 2634 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2635 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2636 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2637 |
|
|---|
| 2638 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2639 | */
|
|---|
| 2640 |
|
|---|
| 2641 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2642 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::MenuItemType
|
|---|
| 2643 |
|
|---|
| 2644 | This enum indicates the type of menu item that the structure describes.
|
|---|
| 2645 |
|
|---|
| 2646 | \value Normal A normal menu item.
|
|---|
| 2647 | \value DefaultItem A menu item that is the default action as specified with \l QMenu::defaultAction().
|
|---|
| 2648 | \value Separator A menu separator.
|
|---|
| 2649 | \value SubMenu Indicates the menu item points to a sub-menu.
|
|---|
| 2650 | \value Scroller A popup menu scroller (currently only used on Mac OS X).
|
|---|
| 2651 | \value TearOff A tear-off handle for the menu.
|
|---|
| 2652 | \value Margin The margin of the menu.
|
|---|
| 2653 | \value EmptyArea The empty area of the menu.
|
|---|
| 2654 |
|
|---|
| 2655 | \sa menuItemType
|
|---|
| 2656 | */
|
|---|
| 2657 |
|
|---|
| 2658 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2659 | \enum QStyleOptionMenuItem::CheckType
|
|---|
| 2660 |
|
|---|
| 2661 | This enum is used to indicate whether or not a check mark should be
|
|---|
| 2662 | drawn for the item, or even if it should be drawn at all.
|
|---|
| 2663 |
|
|---|
| 2664 | \value NotCheckable The item is not checkable.
|
|---|
| 2665 | \value Exclusive The item is an exclusive check item (like a radio button).
|
|---|
| 2666 | \value NonExclusive The item is a non-exclusive check item (like a check box).
|
|---|
| 2667 |
|
|---|
| 2668 | \sa checkType, QAction::checkable, QAction::checked, QActionGroup::exclusive
|
|---|
| 2669 | */
|
|---|
| 2670 |
|
|---|
| 2671 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2672 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuItemType
|
|---|
| 2673 | \brief the type of menu item
|
|---|
| 2674 |
|
|---|
| 2675 | The default value is \l Normal.
|
|---|
| 2676 |
|
|---|
| 2677 | \sa MenuItemType
|
|---|
| 2678 | */
|
|---|
| 2679 |
|
|---|
| 2680 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2681 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::checkType
|
|---|
| 2682 | \brief the type of checkmark of the menu item
|
|---|
| 2683 |
|
|---|
| 2684 | The default value is \l NotCheckable.
|
|---|
| 2685 |
|
|---|
| 2686 | \sa CheckType
|
|---|
| 2687 | */
|
|---|
| 2688 |
|
|---|
| 2689 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2690 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::checked
|
|---|
| 2691 | \brief whether the menu item is checked or not
|
|---|
| 2692 |
|
|---|
| 2693 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 2694 | */
|
|---|
| 2695 |
|
|---|
| 2696 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2697 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuHasCheckableItems
|
|---|
| 2698 | \brief whether the menu as a whole has checkable items or not
|
|---|
| 2699 |
|
|---|
| 2700 | The default value is true.
|
|---|
| 2701 |
|
|---|
| 2702 | If this option is set to false, then the menu has no checkable
|
|---|
| 2703 | items. This makes it possible for GUI styles to save some
|
|---|
| 2704 | horizontal space that would normally be used for the check column.
|
|---|
| 2705 | */
|
|---|
| 2706 |
|
|---|
| 2707 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2708 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::menuRect
|
|---|
| 2709 | \brief the rectangle for the entire menu
|
|---|
| 2710 |
|
|---|
| 2711 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both
|
|---|
| 2712 | the width and the height set to 0.
|
|---|
| 2713 | */
|
|---|
| 2714 |
|
|---|
| 2715 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2716 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::text
|
|---|
| 2717 | \brief the text for the menu item
|
|---|
| 2718 |
|
|---|
| 2719 | Note that the text format is something like this "Menu
|
|---|
| 2720 | text\bold{\\t}Shortcut".
|
|---|
| 2721 |
|
|---|
| 2722 | If the menu item doesn't have a shortcut, it will just contain the
|
|---|
| 2723 | menu item's text. The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 2724 | */
|
|---|
| 2725 |
|
|---|
| 2726 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2727 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::icon
|
|---|
| 2728 | \brief the icon for the menu item
|
|---|
| 2729 |
|
|---|
| 2730 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 2731 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 2732 | */
|
|---|
| 2733 |
|
|---|
| 2734 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2735 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::maxIconWidth
|
|---|
| 2736 | \brief the maximum icon width for the icon in the menu item
|
|---|
| 2737 |
|
|---|
| 2738 | This can be used for drawing the icon into the correct place or
|
|---|
| 2739 | properly aligning items. The variable must be set regardless of
|
|---|
| 2740 | whether or not the menu item has an icon. The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2741 | */
|
|---|
| 2742 |
|
|---|
| 2743 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2744 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::tabWidth
|
|---|
| 2745 | \brief the tab width for the menu item
|
|---|
| 2746 |
|
|---|
| 2747 | The tab width is the distance between the text of the menu item
|
|---|
| 2748 | and the shortcut. The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2749 | */
|
|---|
| 2750 |
|
|---|
| 2751 |
|
|---|
| 2752 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2753 | \variable QStyleOptionMenuItem::font
|
|---|
| 2754 | \brief the font used for the menu item text
|
|---|
| 2755 |
|
|---|
| 2756 | This is the font that should be used for drawing the menu text
|
|---|
| 2757 | minus the shortcut. The shortcut is usually drawn using the
|
|---|
| 2758 | painter's font. By default, the application's default font is
|
|---|
| 2759 | used.
|
|---|
| 2760 | */
|
|---|
| 2761 |
|
|---|
| 2762 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2763 | \class QStyleOptionComplex
|
|---|
| 2764 | \brief The QStyleOptionComplex class is used to hold parameters that are
|
|---|
| 2765 | common to all complex controls.
|
|---|
| 2766 |
|
|---|
| 2767 | This class is not used on its own. Instead it is used to derive
|
|---|
| 2768 | other complex control options, for example QStyleOptionSlider and
|
|---|
| 2769 | QStyleOptionSpinBox.
|
|---|
| 2770 |
|
|---|
| 2771 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 2772 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator).
|
|---|
| 2773 |
|
|---|
| 2774 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2775 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2776 |
|
|---|
| 2777 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 2778 | */
|
|---|
| 2779 |
|
|---|
| 2780 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2781 | Constructs a QStyleOptionComplex of the specified \a type and \a
|
|---|
| 2782 | version, initializing the member variables to their default
|
|---|
| 2783 | values. This constructor is usually called by subclasses.
|
|---|
| 2784 | */
|
|---|
| 2785 |
|
|---|
| 2786 | QStyleOptionComplex::QStyleOptionComplex(int version, int type)
|
|---|
| 2787 | : QStyleOption(version, type), subControls(QStyle::SC_All), activeSubControls(QStyle::SC_None)
|
|---|
| 2788 | {
|
|---|
| 2789 | }
|
|---|
| 2790 |
|
|---|
| 2791 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2792 | \fn QStyleOptionComplex::QStyleOptionComplex(const QStyleOptionComplex &other)
|
|---|
| 2793 |
|
|---|
| 2794 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2795 | */
|
|---|
| 2796 |
|
|---|
| 2797 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2798 | \enum QStyleOptionComplex::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2799 |
|
|---|
| 2800 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2801 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2802 |
|
|---|
| 2803 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Complex} for this class).
|
|---|
| 2804 |
|
|---|
| 2805 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2806 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2807 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2808 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 2809 |
|
|---|
| 2810 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2811 | */
|
|---|
| 2812 |
|
|---|
| 2813 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2814 | \enum QStyleOptionComplex::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2815 |
|
|---|
| 2816 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2817 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2818 |
|
|---|
| 2819 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 2820 |
|
|---|
| 2821 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2822 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2823 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2824 |
|
|---|
| 2825 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2826 | */
|
|---|
| 2827 |
|
|---|
| 2828 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2829 | \variable QStyleOptionComplex::subControls
|
|---|
| 2830 | \brief a bitwise OR of the various sub-controls that need to be
|
|---|
| 2831 | drawn for the complex control
|
|---|
| 2832 |
|
|---|
| 2833 | The default value is QStyle::SC_All.
|
|---|
| 2834 |
|
|---|
| 2835 | \sa QStyle::SubControl
|
|---|
| 2836 | */
|
|---|
| 2837 |
|
|---|
| 2838 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2839 | \variable QStyleOptionComplex::activeSubControls
|
|---|
| 2840 | \brief a bitwise OR of the various sub-controls that are active
|
|---|
| 2841 | (pressed) for the complex control
|
|---|
| 2842 |
|
|---|
| 2843 | The default value is QStyle::SC_None.
|
|---|
| 2844 |
|
|---|
| 2845 | \sa QStyle::SubControl
|
|---|
| 2846 | */
|
|---|
| 2847 |
|
|---|
| 2848 | #ifndef QT_NO_SLIDER
|
|---|
| 2849 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2850 | \class QStyleOptionSlider
|
|---|
| 2851 | \brief The QStyleOptionSlider class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 2852 | parameters needed for drawing a slider.
|
|---|
| 2853 |
|
|---|
| 2854 | QStyleOptionSlider contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 2855 | functions need to draw QSlider and QScrollBar.
|
|---|
| 2856 |
|
|---|
| 2857 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 2858 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 2859 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 2860 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 2861 |
|
|---|
| 2862 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 2863 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 2864 |
|
|---|
| 2865 | \sa QStyleOptionComplex, QSlider, QScrollBar
|
|---|
| 2866 | */
|
|---|
| 2867 |
|
|---|
| 2868 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2869 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSlider, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 2870 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 2871 | */
|
|---|
| 2872 |
|
|---|
| 2873 | QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider()
|
|---|
| 2874 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_Slider), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), minimum(0), maximum(0),
|
|---|
| 2875 | tickPosition(QSlider::NoTicks), tickInterval(0), upsideDown(false),
|
|---|
| 2876 | sliderPosition(0), sliderValue(0), singleStep(0), pageStep(0), notchTarget(0.0),
|
|---|
| 2877 | dialWrapping(false)
|
|---|
| 2878 | {
|
|---|
| 2879 | }
|
|---|
| 2880 |
|
|---|
| 2881 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2882 | \internal
|
|---|
| 2883 | */
|
|---|
| 2884 | QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider(int version)
|
|---|
| 2885 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_Slider), orientation(Qt::Horizontal), minimum(0), maximum(0),
|
|---|
| 2886 | tickPosition(QSlider::NoTicks), tickInterval(0), upsideDown(false),
|
|---|
| 2887 | sliderPosition(0), sliderValue(0), singleStep(0), pageStep(0), notchTarget(0.0),
|
|---|
| 2888 | dialWrapping(false)
|
|---|
| 2889 | {
|
|---|
| 2890 | }
|
|---|
| 2891 |
|
|---|
| 2892 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2893 | \fn QStyleOptionSlider::QStyleOptionSlider(const QStyleOptionSlider &other)
|
|---|
| 2894 |
|
|---|
| 2895 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 2896 | */
|
|---|
| 2897 |
|
|---|
| 2898 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2899 | \enum QStyleOptionSlider::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2900 |
|
|---|
| 2901 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2902 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2903 |
|
|---|
| 2904 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Slider} for this class).
|
|---|
| 2905 |
|
|---|
| 2906 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 2907 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 2908 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 2909 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 2910 |
|
|---|
| 2911 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2912 | */
|
|---|
| 2913 |
|
|---|
| 2914 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2915 | \enum QStyleOptionSlider::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 2916 |
|
|---|
| 2917 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 2918 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 2919 |
|
|---|
| 2920 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 2921 |
|
|---|
| 2922 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 2923 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 2924 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 2925 |
|
|---|
| 2926 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 2927 | */
|
|---|
| 2928 |
|
|---|
| 2929 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2930 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::orientation
|
|---|
| 2931 | \brief the slider's orientation (horizontal or vertical)
|
|---|
| 2932 |
|
|---|
| 2933 | The default orientation is Qt::Horizontal.
|
|---|
| 2934 |
|
|---|
| 2935 | \sa Qt::Orientation
|
|---|
| 2936 | */
|
|---|
| 2937 |
|
|---|
| 2938 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2939 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::minimum
|
|---|
| 2940 | \brief the minimum value for the slider
|
|---|
| 2941 |
|
|---|
| 2942 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2943 | */
|
|---|
| 2944 |
|
|---|
| 2945 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2946 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::maximum
|
|---|
| 2947 | \brief the maximum value for the slider
|
|---|
| 2948 |
|
|---|
| 2949 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2950 | */
|
|---|
| 2951 |
|
|---|
| 2952 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2953 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::tickPosition
|
|---|
| 2954 | \brief the position of the slider's tick marks, if any
|
|---|
| 2955 |
|
|---|
| 2956 | The default value is QSlider::NoTicks.
|
|---|
| 2957 |
|
|---|
| 2958 | \sa QSlider::TickPosition
|
|---|
| 2959 | */
|
|---|
| 2960 |
|
|---|
| 2961 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2962 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::tickInterval
|
|---|
| 2963 | \brief the interval that should be drawn between tick marks
|
|---|
| 2964 |
|
|---|
| 2965 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 2966 | */
|
|---|
| 2967 |
|
|---|
| 2968 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2969 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::notchTarget
|
|---|
| 2970 | \brief the number of pixel between notches
|
|---|
| 2971 |
|
|---|
| 2972 | The default value is 0.0.
|
|---|
| 2973 |
|
|---|
| 2974 | \sa QDial::notchTarget()
|
|---|
| 2975 | */
|
|---|
| 2976 |
|
|---|
| 2977 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2978 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::dialWrapping
|
|---|
| 2979 | \brief whether the dial should wrap or not
|
|---|
| 2980 |
|
|---|
| 2981 | The default value is false, i.e. the dial is not wrapped.
|
|---|
| 2982 |
|
|---|
| 2983 | \sa QDial::wrapping()
|
|---|
| 2984 | */
|
|---|
| 2985 |
|
|---|
| 2986 | /*!
|
|---|
| 2987 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::upsideDown
|
|---|
| 2988 | \brief the slider control orientation
|
|---|
| 2989 |
|
|---|
| 2990 | Normally a slider increases as it moves up or to the right;
|
|---|
| 2991 | upsideDown indicates that it should do the opposite (increase as
|
|---|
| 2992 | it moves down or to the left). The default value is false,
|
|---|
| 2993 | i.e. the slider increases as it moves up or to the right.
|
|---|
| 2994 |
|
|---|
| 2995 | \sa QStyle::sliderPositionFromValue(),
|
|---|
| 2996 | QStyle::sliderValueFromPosition(),
|
|---|
| 2997 | QAbstractSlider::invertedAppearance
|
|---|
| 2998 | */
|
|---|
| 2999 |
|
|---|
| 3000 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3001 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::sliderPosition
|
|---|
| 3002 | \brief the position of the slider handle
|
|---|
| 3003 |
|
|---|
| 3004 | If the slider has active feedback (i.e.,
|
|---|
| 3005 | QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same as
|
|---|
| 3006 | \l sliderValue. Otherwise, it will have the current position of
|
|---|
| 3007 | the handle. The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3008 |
|
|---|
| 3009 | \sa QAbstractSlider::tracking, sliderValue
|
|---|
| 3010 | */
|
|---|
| 3011 |
|
|---|
| 3012 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3013 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::sliderValue
|
|---|
| 3014 | \brief the value of the slider
|
|---|
| 3015 |
|
|---|
| 3016 | If the slider has active feedback (i.e.,
|
|---|
| 3017 | QAbstractSlider::tracking is true), this value will be the same
|
|---|
| 3018 | as \l sliderPosition. Otherwise, it will have the value the
|
|---|
| 3019 | slider had before the mouse was pressed.
|
|---|
| 3020 |
|
|---|
| 3021 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3022 |
|
|---|
| 3023 | \sa QAbstractSlider::tracking sliderPosition
|
|---|
| 3024 | */
|
|---|
| 3025 |
|
|---|
| 3026 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3027 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::singleStep
|
|---|
| 3028 | \brief the size of the single step of the slider
|
|---|
| 3029 |
|
|---|
| 3030 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3031 |
|
|---|
| 3032 | \sa QAbstractSlider::singleStep
|
|---|
| 3033 | */
|
|---|
| 3034 |
|
|---|
| 3035 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3036 | \variable QStyleOptionSlider::pageStep
|
|---|
| 3037 | \brief the size of the page step of the slider
|
|---|
| 3038 |
|
|---|
| 3039 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3040 |
|
|---|
| 3041 | \sa QAbstractSlider::pageStep
|
|---|
| 3042 | */
|
|---|
| 3043 | #endif // QT_NO_SLIDER
|
|---|
| 3044 |
|
|---|
| 3045 | #ifndef QT_NO_SPINBOX
|
|---|
| 3046 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3047 | \class QStyleOptionSpinBox
|
|---|
| 3048 | \brief The QStyleOptionSpinBox class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3049 | parameters necessary for drawing a spin box.
|
|---|
| 3050 |
|
|---|
| 3051 | QStyleOptionSpinBox contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3052 | functions need to draw QSpinBox and QDateTimeEdit.
|
|---|
| 3053 |
|
|---|
| 3054 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3055 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3056 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3057 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3058 |
|
|---|
| 3059 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3060 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3061 |
|
|---|
| 3062 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex
|
|---|
| 3063 | */
|
|---|
| 3064 |
|
|---|
| 3065 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3066 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSpinBox, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 3067 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3068 | */
|
|---|
| 3069 |
|
|---|
| 3070 | QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox()
|
|---|
| 3071 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_SpinBox), buttonSymbols(QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows),
|
|---|
| 3072 | stepEnabled(QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone), frame(false)
|
|---|
| 3073 | {
|
|---|
| 3074 | }
|
|---|
| 3075 |
|
|---|
| 3076 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3077 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3078 | */
|
|---|
| 3079 | QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox(int version)
|
|---|
| 3080 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_SpinBox), buttonSymbols(QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows),
|
|---|
| 3081 | stepEnabled(QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone), frame(false)
|
|---|
| 3082 | {
|
|---|
| 3083 | }
|
|---|
| 3084 |
|
|---|
| 3085 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3086 | \fn QStyleOptionSpinBox::QStyleOptionSpinBox(const QStyleOptionSpinBox &other)
|
|---|
| 3087 |
|
|---|
| 3088 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3089 | */
|
|---|
| 3090 |
|
|---|
| 3091 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3092 | \enum QStyleOptionSpinBox::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3093 |
|
|---|
| 3094 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3095 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3096 |
|
|---|
| 3097 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_SpinBox} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3098 |
|
|---|
| 3099 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3100 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3101 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3102 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3103 |
|
|---|
| 3104 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3105 | */
|
|---|
| 3106 |
|
|---|
| 3107 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3108 | \enum QStyleOptionSpinBox::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3109 |
|
|---|
| 3110 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3111 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3112 |
|
|---|
| 3113 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3114 |
|
|---|
| 3115 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3116 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3117 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3118 |
|
|---|
| 3119 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3120 | */
|
|---|
| 3121 |
|
|---|
| 3122 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3123 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::buttonSymbols
|
|---|
| 3124 | \brief the type of button symbols to draw for the spin box
|
|---|
| 3125 |
|
|---|
| 3126 | The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::UpDownArrows specufying
|
|---|
| 3127 | little arrows in the classic style.
|
|---|
| 3128 |
|
|---|
| 3129 | \sa QAbstractSpinBox::ButtonSymbols
|
|---|
| 3130 | */
|
|---|
| 3131 |
|
|---|
| 3132 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3133 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::stepEnabled
|
|---|
| 3134 | \brief which buttons of the spin box that are enabled
|
|---|
| 3135 |
|
|---|
| 3136 | The default value is QAbstractSpinBox::StepNone.
|
|---|
| 3137 |
|
|---|
| 3138 | \sa QAbstractSpinBox::StepEnabled
|
|---|
| 3139 | */
|
|---|
| 3140 |
|
|---|
| 3141 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3142 | \variable QStyleOptionSpinBox::frame
|
|---|
| 3143 | \brief whether the spin box has a frame
|
|---|
| 3144 |
|
|---|
| 3145 | The default value is false, i.e. the spin box has no frame.
|
|---|
| 3146 | */
|
|---|
| 3147 | #endif // QT_NO_SPINBOX
|
|---|
| 3148 |
|
|---|
| 3149 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3150 | \class QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem
|
|---|
| 3151 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem class is used to describe an
|
|---|
| 3152 | item drawn in a Q3ListView.
|
|---|
| 3153 |
|
|---|
| 3154 | This class is used for drawing the compatibility Q3ListView's
|
|---|
| 3155 | items. \bold {It is not recommended for new classes}.
|
|---|
| 3156 |
|
|---|
| 3157 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem contains all the information that
|
|---|
| 3158 | QStyle functions need to draw the Q3ListView items.
|
|---|
| 3159 |
|
|---|
| 3160 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3161 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3162 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3163 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3164 |
|
|---|
| 3165 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3166 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3167 |
|
|---|
| 3168 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionQ3ListView, Q3ListViewItem
|
|---|
| 3169 | */
|
|---|
| 3170 |
|
|---|
| 3171 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3172 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::Q3ListViewItemFeature
|
|---|
| 3173 |
|
|---|
| 3174 | This enum describes the features a list view item can have.
|
|---|
| 3175 |
|
|---|
| 3176 | \value None A standard item.
|
|---|
| 3177 | \value Expandable The item has children that can be shown.
|
|---|
| 3178 | \value MultiLine The item is more than one line tall.
|
|---|
| 3179 | \value Visible The item is visible.
|
|---|
| 3180 | \value ParentControl The item's parent is a type of item control (Q3CheckListItem::Controller).
|
|---|
| 3181 |
|
|---|
| 3182 | \sa features, Q3ListViewItem::isVisible(), Q3ListViewItem::multiLinesEnabled(),
|
|---|
| 3183 | Q3ListViewItem::isExpandable()
|
|---|
| 3184 | */
|
|---|
| 3185 |
|
|---|
| 3186 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3187 | Constructs a QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 3188 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3189 | */
|
|---|
| 3190 |
|
|---|
| 3191 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem()
|
|---|
| 3192 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Q3ListViewItem), features(None), height(0), totalHeight(0),
|
|---|
| 3193 | itemY(0), childCount(0)
|
|---|
| 3194 | {
|
|---|
| 3195 | }
|
|---|
| 3196 |
|
|---|
| 3197 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3198 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3199 | */
|
|---|
| 3200 | QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem(int version)
|
|---|
| 3201 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Q3ListViewItem), features(None), height(0), totalHeight(0),
|
|---|
| 3202 | itemY(0), childCount(0)
|
|---|
| 3203 | {
|
|---|
| 3204 | }
|
|---|
| 3205 |
|
|---|
| 3206 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3207 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem(const QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 3208 |
|
|---|
| 3209 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3210 | */
|
|---|
| 3211 |
|
|---|
| 3212 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3213 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3214 |
|
|---|
| 3215 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3216 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3217 |
|
|---|
| 3218 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3ListViewItem} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3219 |
|
|---|
| 3220 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3221 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3222 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3223 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3224 |
|
|---|
| 3225 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3226 | */
|
|---|
| 3227 |
|
|---|
| 3228 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3229 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3230 |
|
|---|
| 3231 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3232 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3233 |
|
|---|
| 3234 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3235 |
|
|---|
| 3236 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3237 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3238 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3239 |
|
|---|
| 3240 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3241 | */
|
|---|
| 3242 |
|
|---|
| 3243 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3244 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::features
|
|---|
| 3245 | \brief the features for this item
|
|---|
| 3246 |
|
|---|
| 3247 | This variable is a bitwise OR of the features of the item. The deafult value is \l None.
|
|---|
| 3248 |
|
|---|
| 3249 | \sa Q3ListViewItemFeature
|
|---|
| 3250 | */
|
|---|
| 3251 |
|
|---|
| 3252 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3253 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::height
|
|---|
| 3254 | \brief the height of the item
|
|---|
| 3255 |
|
|---|
| 3256 | This doesn't include the height of the item's children. The default height is 0.
|
|---|
| 3257 |
|
|---|
| 3258 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::height()
|
|---|
| 3259 | */
|
|---|
| 3260 |
|
|---|
| 3261 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3262 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::totalHeight
|
|---|
| 3263 | \brief the total height of the item, including its children
|
|---|
| 3264 |
|
|---|
| 3265 | The default total height is 0.
|
|---|
| 3266 |
|
|---|
| 3267 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::totalHeight()
|
|---|
| 3268 | */
|
|---|
| 3269 |
|
|---|
| 3270 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3271 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::itemY
|
|---|
| 3272 | \brief the Y-coordinate for the item
|
|---|
| 3273 |
|
|---|
| 3274 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3275 |
|
|---|
| 3276 | \sa Q3ListViewItem::itemPos()
|
|---|
| 3277 | */
|
|---|
| 3278 |
|
|---|
| 3279 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3280 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem::childCount
|
|---|
| 3281 | \brief the number of children the item has
|
|---|
| 3282 | */
|
|---|
| 3283 |
|
|---|
| 3284 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3285 | \class QStyleOptionQ3ListView
|
|---|
| 3286 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3ListView class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3287 | parameters for drawing a Q3ListView.
|
|---|
| 3288 |
|
|---|
| 3289 | This class is used for drawing the compatibility Q3ListView. \bold
|
|---|
| 3290 | {It is not recommended for new classes}.
|
|---|
| 3291 |
|
|---|
| 3292 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3293 | functions need to draw Q3ListView.
|
|---|
| 3294 |
|
|---|
| 3295 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3296 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3297 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3298 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3299 |
|
|---|
| 3300 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3301 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3302 |
|
|---|
| 3303 | \sa QStyleOptionComplex, Q3ListView, QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem
|
|---|
| 3304 | */
|
|---|
| 3305 |
|
|---|
| 3306 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3307 | Creates a QStyleOptionQ3ListView, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 3308 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3309 | */
|
|---|
| 3310 |
|
|---|
| 3311 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView()
|
|---|
| 3312 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_Q3ListView), viewportBGRole(QPalette::Base),
|
|---|
| 3313 | sortColumn(0), itemMargin(0), treeStepSize(0), rootIsDecorated(false)
|
|---|
| 3314 | {
|
|---|
| 3315 | }
|
|---|
| 3316 |
|
|---|
| 3317 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3318 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3319 | */
|
|---|
| 3320 | QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView(int version)
|
|---|
| 3321 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_Q3ListView), viewportBGRole(QPalette::Base),
|
|---|
| 3322 | sortColumn(0), itemMargin(0), treeStepSize(0), rootIsDecorated(false)
|
|---|
| 3323 | {
|
|---|
| 3324 | }
|
|---|
| 3325 |
|
|---|
| 3326 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3327 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3ListView::QStyleOptionQ3ListView(const QStyleOptionQ3ListView &other)
|
|---|
| 3328 |
|
|---|
| 3329 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3330 | */
|
|---|
| 3331 |
|
|---|
| 3332 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3333 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListView::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3334 |
|
|---|
| 3335 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3336 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3337 |
|
|---|
| 3338 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3ListView} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3339 |
|
|---|
| 3340 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3341 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3342 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3343 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3344 |
|
|---|
| 3345 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3346 | */
|
|---|
| 3347 |
|
|---|
| 3348 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3349 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3ListView::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3350 |
|
|---|
| 3351 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3352 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3353 |
|
|---|
| 3354 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3355 |
|
|---|
| 3356 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3357 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3358 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3359 |
|
|---|
| 3360 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3361 | */
|
|---|
| 3362 |
|
|---|
| 3363 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3364 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::items
|
|---|
| 3365 | \brief a list of items in the Q3ListView
|
|---|
| 3366 |
|
|---|
| 3367 | This is a list of \l {QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem}s. The first item
|
|---|
| 3368 | can be used for most of the calculation that are needed for
|
|---|
| 3369 | drawing a list view. Any additional items are the children of
|
|---|
| 3370 | this first item, which may be used for additional information.
|
|---|
| 3371 |
|
|---|
| 3372 | \sa QStyleOptionQ3ListViewItem
|
|---|
| 3373 | */
|
|---|
| 3374 |
|
|---|
| 3375 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3376 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::viewportPalette
|
|---|
| 3377 | \brief the palette of Q3ListView's viewport
|
|---|
| 3378 |
|
|---|
| 3379 | By default, the application's default palette is used.
|
|---|
| 3380 | */
|
|---|
| 3381 |
|
|---|
| 3382 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3383 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::viewportBGRole
|
|---|
| 3384 | \brief the background role of Q3ListView's viewport
|
|---|
| 3385 |
|
|---|
| 3386 | The default value is QPalette::Base.
|
|---|
| 3387 |
|
|---|
| 3388 | \sa QWidget::backgroundRole()
|
|---|
| 3389 | */
|
|---|
| 3390 |
|
|---|
| 3391 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3392 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::sortColumn
|
|---|
| 3393 | \brief the sort column of the list view
|
|---|
| 3394 |
|
|---|
| 3395 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3396 |
|
|---|
| 3397 | \sa Q3ListView::sortColumn()
|
|---|
| 3398 | */
|
|---|
| 3399 |
|
|---|
| 3400 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3401 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::itemMargin
|
|---|
| 3402 | \brief the margin for items in the list view
|
|---|
| 3403 |
|
|---|
| 3404 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3405 |
|
|---|
| 3406 | \sa Q3ListView::itemMargin()
|
|---|
| 3407 | */
|
|---|
| 3408 |
|
|---|
| 3409 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3410 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::treeStepSize
|
|---|
| 3411 | \brief the number of pixel to offset children items from their
|
|---|
| 3412 | parents
|
|---|
| 3413 |
|
|---|
| 3414 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 3415 |
|
|---|
| 3416 | \sa Q3ListView::treeStepSize()
|
|---|
| 3417 | */
|
|---|
| 3418 |
|
|---|
| 3419 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3420 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3ListView::rootIsDecorated
|
|---|
| 3421 | \brief whether root items are decorated
|
|---|
| 3422 |
|
|---|
| 3423 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 3424 |
|
|---|
| 3425 | \sa Q3ListView::rootIsDecorated()
|
|---|
| 3426 | */
|
|---|
| 3427 |
|
|---|
| 3428 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3429 | \class QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow
|
|---|
| 3430 | \brief The QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3431 | parameters for drawing various parts of a Q3DockWindow.
|
|---|
| 3432 |
|
|---|
| 3433 | This class is used for drawing the old Q3DockWindow and its
|
|---|
| 3434 | parts. \bold {It is not recommended for new classes}.
|
|---|
| 3435 |
|
|---|
| 3436 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3437 | functions need to draw Q3DockWindow and its parts.
|
|---|
| 3438 |
|
|---|
| 3439 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3440 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3441 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3442 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3443 |
|
|---|
| 3444 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3445 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3446 |
|
|---|
| 3447 | \sa QStyleOption, Q3DockWindow
|
|---|
| 3448 | */
|
|---|
| 3449 |
|
|---|
| 3450 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3451 | Constructs a QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow, initializing the member
|
|---|
| 3452 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3453 | */
|
|---|
| 3454 |
|
|---|
| 3455 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow()
|
|---|
| 3456 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_Q3DockWindow), docked(false), closeEnabled(false)
|
|---|
| 3457 | {
|
|---|
| 3458 | }
|
|---|
| 3459 |
|
|---|
| 3460 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3461 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3462 | */
|
|---|
| 3463 | QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow(int version)
|
|---|
| 3464 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_Q3DockWindow), docked(false), closeEnabled(false)
|
|---|
| 3465 | {
|
|---|
| 3466 | }
|
|---|
| 3467 |
|
|---|
| 3468 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3469 | \fn QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow(const QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow &other)
|
|---|
| 3470 |
|
|---|
| 3471 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3472 | */
|
|---|
| 3473 |
|
|---|
| 3474 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3475 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3476 |
|
|---|
| 3477 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3478 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3479 |
|
|---|
| 3480 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_Q3DockWindow} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3481 |
|
|---|
| 3482 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3483 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3484 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3485 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3486 |
|
|---|
| 3487 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3488 | */
|
|---|
| 3489 |
|
|---|
| 3490 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3491 | \enum QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3492 |
|
|---|
| 3493 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3494 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3495 |
|
|---|
| 3496 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3497 |
|
|---|
| 3498 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3499 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3500 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3501 |
|
|---|
| 3502 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3503 | */
|
|---|
| 3504 |
|
|---|
| 3505 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3506 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::docked
|
|---|
| 3507 | \brief whether the dock window is currently docked
|
|---|
| 3508 |
|
|---|
| 3509 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 3510 | */
|
|---|
| 3511 |
|
|---|
| 3512 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3513 | \variable QStyleOptionQ3DockWindow::closeEnabled
|
|---|
| 3514 | \brief whether the dock window has a close button
|
|---|
| 3515 |
|
|---|
| 3516 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 3517 | */
|
|---|
| 3518 |
|
|---|
| 3519 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3520 | \class QStyleOptionDockWidget
|
|---|
| 3521 | \brief The QStyleOptionDockWidget class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3522 | parameters for drawing a dock widget.
|
|---|
| 3523 |
|
|---|
| 3524 | QStyleOptionDockWidget contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3525 | functions need to draw graphical elements like QDockWidget.
|
|---|
| 3526 |
|
|---|
| 3527 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3528 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3529 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3530 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3531 |
|
|---|
| 3532 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3533 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3534 |
|
|---|
| 3535 | \sa QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 3536 | */
|
|---|
| 3537 |
|
|---|
| 3538 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3539 | Constructs a QStyleOptionDockWidget, initializing the member
|
|---|
| 3540 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3541 | */
|
|---|
| 3542 |
|
|---|
| 3543 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget()
|
|---|
| 3544 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_DockWidget), movable(false)
|
|---|
| 3545 | {
|
|---|
| 3546 | }
|
|---|
| 3547 |
|
|---|
| 3548 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3549 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3550 | */
|
|---|
| 3551 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget(int version)
|
|---|
| 3552 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_DockWidget), closable(false),
|
|---|
| 3553 | movable(false), floatable(false)
|
|---|
| 3554 | {
|
|---|
| 3555 | }
|
|---|
| 3556 |
|
|---|
| 3557 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2()
|
|---|
| 3558 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(Version), verticalTitleBar(false)
|
|---|
| 3559 | {
|
|---|
| 3560 | }
|
|---|
| 3561 |
|
|---|
| 3562 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2(
|
|---|
| 3563 | const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other)
|
|---|
| 3564 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(Version)
|
|---|
| 3565 | {
|
|---|
| 3566 | (void)QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 3567 | }
|
|---|
| 3568 |
|
|---|
| 3569 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2 &QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::operator = (
|
|---|
| 3570 | const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other)
|
|---|
| 3571 | {
|
|---|
| 3572 | QStyleOptionDockWidget::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 3573 | const QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2 *v2
|
|---|
| 3574 | = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2*>(&other);
|
|---|
| 3575 | verticalTitleBar = v2 ? v2->verticalTitleBar : false;
|
|---|
| 3576 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 3577 | }
|
|---|
| 3578 |
|
|---|
| 3579 | QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2::QStyleOptionDockWidgetV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 3580 | : QStyleOptionDockWidget(version), verticalTitleBar(false)
|
|---|
| 3581 | {
|
|---|
| 3582 | }
|
|---|
| 3583 |
|
|---|
| 3584 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3585 | \fn QStyleOptionDockWidget::QStyleOptionDockWidget(const QStyleOptionDockWidget &other)
|
|---|
| 3586 |
|
|---|
| 3587 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3588 | */
|
|---|
| 3589 |
|
|---|
| 3590 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3591 | \enum QStyleOptionDockWidget::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3592 |
|
|---|
| 3593 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3594 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3595 |
|
|---|
| 3596 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_DockWidget} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3597 |
|
|---|
| 3598 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3599 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3600 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3601 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3602 |
|
|---|
| 3603 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3604 | */
|
|---|
| 3605 |
|
|---|
| 3606 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3607 | \enum QStyleOptionDockWidget::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3608 |
|
|---|
| 3609 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3610 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3611 |
|
|---|
| 3612 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3613 |
|
|---|
| 3614 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3615 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3616 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3617 |
|
|---|
| 3618 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3619 | */
|
|---|
| 3620 |
|
|---|
| 3621 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3622 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::title
|
|---|
| 3623 | \brief the title of the dock window
|
|---|
| 3624 |
|
|---|
| 3625 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 3626 | */
|
|---|
| 3627 |
|
|---|
| 3628 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3629 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::closable
|
|---|
| 3630 | \brief whether the dock window is closable
|
|---|
| 3631 |
|
|---|
| 3632 | The default value is true.
|
|---|
| 3633 | */
|
|---|
| 3634 |
|
|---|
| 3635 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3636 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::movable
|
|---|
| 3637 | \brief whether the dock window is movable
|
|---|
| 3638 |
|
|---|
| 3639 | The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 3640 | */
|
|---|
| 3641 |
|
|---|
| 3642 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3643 | \variable QStyleOptionDockWidget::floatable
|
|---|
| 3644 | \brief whether the dock window is floatable
|
|---|
| 3645 |
|
|---|
| 3646 | The default value is true.
|
|---|
| 3647 | */
|
|---|
| 3648 |
|
|---|
| 3649 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3650 | \class QStyleOptionToolButton
|
|---|
| 3651 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolButton class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3652 | parameters for drawing a tool button.
|
|---|
| 3653 |
|
|---|
| 3654 | QStyleOptionToolButton contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3655 | functions need to draw QToolButton.
|
|---|
| 3656 |
|
|---|
| 3657 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3658 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3659 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3660 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3661 |
|
|---|
| 3662 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3663 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3664 |
|
|---|
| 3665 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QStyleOptionButton
|
|---|
| 3666 | */
|
|---|
| 3667 |
|
|---|
| 3668 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3669 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::ToolButtonFeature
|
|---|
| 3670 | Describes the various features that a tool button can have.
|
|---|
| 3671 |
|
|---|
| 3672 | \value None A normal tool button.
|
|---|
| 3673 | \value Arrow The tool button is an arrow.
|
|---|
| 3674 | \value Menu The tool button has a menu.
|
|---|
| 3675 | \value PopupDelay There is a delay to showing the menu.
|
|---|
| 3676 | \value HasMenu The button has a popup menu.
|
|---|
| 3677 | \value MenuButtonPopup The button should display an arrow to
|
|---|
| 3678 | indicate that a menu is present.
|
|---|
| 3679 |
|
|---|
| 3680 | \sa features, QToolButton::toolButtonStyle(), QToolButton::popupMode()
|
|---|
| 3681 | */
|
|---|
| 3682 |
|
|---|
| 3683 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3684 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolButton, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 3685 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3686 | */
|
|---|
| 3687 |
|
|---|
| 3688 | QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton()
|
|---|
| 3689 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_ToolButton), features(None), arrowType(Qt::DownArrow)
|
|---|
| 3690 | , toolButtonStyle(Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly)
|
|---|
| 3691 | {
|
|---|
| 3692 | }
|
|---|
| 3693 |
|
|---|
| 3694 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3695 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3696 | */
|
|---|
| 3697 | QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton(int version)
|
|---|
| 3698 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_ToolButton), features(None), arrowType(Qt::DownArrow)
|
|---|
| 3699 | , toolButtonStyle(Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly)
|
|---|
| 3700 |
|
|---|
| 3701 | {
|
|---|
| 3702 | }
|
|---|
| 3703 |
|
|---|
| 3704 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3705 | \fn QStyleOptionToolButton::QStyleOptionToolButton(const QStyleOptionToolButton &other)
|
|---|
| 3706 |
|
|---|
| 3707 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3708 | */
|
|---|
| 3709 |
|
|---|
| 3710 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3711 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3712 |
|
|---|
| 3713 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3714 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3715 |
|
|---|
| 3716 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolButton} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3717 |
|
|---|
| 3718 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3719 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3720 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3721 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3722 |
|
|---|
| 3723 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3724 | */
|
|---|
| 3725 |
|
|---|
| 3726 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3727 | \enum QStyleOptionToolButton::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3728 |
|
|---|
| 3729 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3730 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3731 |
|
|---|
| 3732 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3733 |
|
|---|
| 3734 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3735 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3736 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3737 |
|
|---|
| 3738 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3739 | */
|
|---|
| 3740 |
|
|---|
| 3741 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3742 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::features
|
|---|
| 3743 | \brief an OR combination of the tool button's features
|
|---|
| 3744 |
|
|---|
| 3745 | The default value is \l None.
|
|---|
| 3746 |
|
|---|
| 3747 | \sa ToolButtonFeature
|
|---|
| 3748 | */
|
|---|
| 3749 |
|
|---|
| 3750 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3751 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::icon
|
|---|
| 3752 | \brief the icon for the tool button
|
|---|
| 3753 |
|
|---|
| 3754 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 3755 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 3756 |
|
|---|
| 3757 | \sa iconSize
|
|---|
| 3758 | */
|
|---|
| 3759 |
|
|---|
| 3760 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3761 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::iconSize
|
|---|
| 3762 | \brief the size of the icon for the tool button
|
|---|
| 3763 |
|
|---|
| 3764 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 3765 | */
|
|---|
| 3766 |
|
|---|
| 3767 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3768 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::text
|
|---|
| 3769 | \brief the text of the tool button
|
|---|
| 3770 |
|
|---|
| 3771 | This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is
|
|---|
| 3772 | Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or
|
|---|
| 3773 | Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 3774 | */
|
|---|
| 3775 |
|
|---|
| 3776 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3777 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::arrowType
|
|---|
| 3778 | \brief the direction of the arrow for the tool button
|
|---|
| 3779 |
|
|---|
| 3780 | This value is only used if \l features includes \l Arrow. The
|
|---|
| 3781 | default value is Qt::DownArrow.
|
|---|
| 3782 | */
|
|---|
| 3783 |
|
|---|
| 3784 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3785 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::toolButtonStyle
|
|---|
| 3786 | \brief a Qt::ToolButtonStyle value describing the appearance of
|
|---|
| 3787 | the tool button
|
|---|
| 3788 |
|
|---|
| 3789 | The default value is Qt::ToolButtonIconOnly.
|
|---|
| 3790 |
|
|---|
| 3791 | \sa QToolButton::toolButtonStyle()
|
|---|
| 3792 | */
|
|---|
| 3793 |
|
|---|
| 3794 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3795 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::pos
|
|---|
| 3796 | \brief the position of the tool button
|
|---|
| 3797 |
|
|---|
| 3798 | The default value is a null point, i.e. (0, 0)
|
|---|
| 3799 | */
|
|---|
| 3800 |
|
|---|
| 3801 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3802 | \variable QStyleOptionToolButton::font
|
|---|
| 3803 | \brief the font that is used for the text
|
|---|
| 3804 |
|
|---|
| 3805 | This value is only used if toolButtonStyle is
|
|---|
| 3806 | Qt::ToolButtonTextUnderIcon, Qt::ToolButtonTextBesideIcon, or
|
|---|
| 3807 | Qt::ToolButtonTextOnly. By default, the application's default font
|
|---|
| 3808 | is used.
|
|---|
| 3809 | */
|
|---|
| 3810 |
|
|---|
| 3811 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3812 | \class QStyleOptionComboBox
|
|---|
| 3813 | \brief The QStyleOptionComboBox class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3814 | parameter for drawing a combobox.
|
|---|
| 3815 |
|
|---|
| 3816 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3817 | functions need to draw QComboBox.
|
|---|
| 3818 |
|
|---|
| 3819 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3820 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3821 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3822 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3823 |
|
|---|
| 3824 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3825 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3826 |
|
|---|
| 3827 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QComboBox
|
|---|
| 3828 | */
|
|---|
| 3829 |
|
|---|
| 3830 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3831 | Creates a QStyleOptionComboBox, initializing the members variables
|
|---|
| 3832 | to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3833 | */
|
|---|
| 3834 |
|
|---|
| 3835 | QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox()
|
|---|
| 3836 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_ComboBox), editable(false), frame(true)
|
|---|
| 3837 | {
|
|---|
| 3838 | }
|
|---|
| 3839 |
|
|---|
| 3840 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3841 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3842 | */
|
|---|
| 3843 | QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox(int version)
|
|---|
| 3844 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_ComboBox), editable(false), frame(true)
|
|---|
| 3845 | {
|
|---|
| 3846 | }
|
|---|
| 3847 |
|
|---|
| 3848 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3849 | \fn QStyleOptionComboBox::QStyleOptionComboBox(const QStyleOptionComboBox &other)
|
|---|
| 3850 |
|
|---|
| 3851 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3852 | */
|
|---|
| 3853 |
|
|---|
| 3854 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3855 | \enum QStyleOptionComboBox::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3856 |
|
|---|
| 3857 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3858 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3859 |
|
|---|
| 3860 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ComboBox} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3861 |
|
|---|
| 3862 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3863 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3864 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3865 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3866 |
|
|---|
| 3867 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3868 | */
|
|---|
| 3869 |
|
|---|
| 3870 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3871 | \enum QStyleOptionComboBox::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3872 |
|
|---|
| 3873 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3874 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3875 |
|
|---|
| 3876 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 3877 |
|
|---|
| 3878 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 3879 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 3880 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 3881 |
|
|---|
| 3882 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3883 | */
|
|---|
| 3884 |
|
|---|
| 3885 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3886 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::editable
|
|---|
| 3887 | \brief whether or not the combobox is editable or not
|
|---|
| 3888 |
|
|---|
| 3889 | the default
|
|---|
| 3890 | value is false
|
|---|
| 3891 |
|
|---|
| 3892 | \sa QComboBox::isEditable()
|
|---|
| 3893 | */
|
|---|
| 3894 |
|
|---|
| 3895 |
|
|---|
| 3896 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3897 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::frame
|
|---|
| 3898 | \brief whether the combo box has a frame
|
|---|
| 3899 |
|
|---|
| 3900 | The default value is true.
|
|---|
| 3901 | */
|
|---|
| 3902 |
|
|---|
| 3903 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3904 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::currentText
|
|---|
| 3905 | \brief the text for the current item of the combo box
|
|---|
| 3906 |
|
|---|
| 3907 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 3908 | */
|
|---|
| 3909 |
|
|---|
| 3910 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3911 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::currentIcon
|
|---|
| 3912 | \brief the icon for the current item of the combo box
|
|---|
| 3913 |
|
|---|
| 3914 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 3915 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 3916 | */
|
|---|
| 3917 |
|
|---|
| 3918 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3919 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::iconSize
|
|---|
| 3920 | \brief the icon size for the current item of the combo box
|
|---|
| 3921 |
|
|---|
| 3922 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 3923 | */
|
|---|
| 3924 |
|
|---|
| 3925 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3926 | \variable QStyleOptionComboBox::popupRect
|
|---|
| 3927 | \brief the popup rectangle for the combobox
|
|---|
| 3928 |
|
|---|
| 3929 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both
|
|---|
| 3930 | the width and the height set to 0.
|
|---|
| 3931 |
|
|---|
| 3932 | This variable is currently unused. You can safely ignore it.
|
|---|
| 3933 |
|
|---|
| 3934 | \sa QStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup
|
|---|
| 3935 | */
|
|---|
| 3936 |
|
|---|
| 3937 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3938 | \class QStyleOptionToolBox
|
|---|
| 3939 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBox class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 3940 | parameters needed for drawing a tool box.
|
|---|
| 3941 |
|
|---|
| 3942 | QStyleOptionToolBox contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 3943 | functions need to draw QToolBox.
|
|---|
| 3944 |
|
|---|
| 3945 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 3946 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 3947 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 3948 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 3949 |
|
|---|
| 3950 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 3951 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 3952 |
|
|---|
| 3953 | \sa QStyleOption, QToolBox
|
|---|
| 3954 | */
|
|---|
| 3955 |
|
|---|
| 3956 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3957 | Creates a QStyleOptionToolBox, initializing the members variables
|
|---|
| 3958 | to their default values.
|
|---|
| 3959 | */
|
|---|
| 3960 |
|
|---|
| 3961 | QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox()
|
|---|
| 3962 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ToolBox)
|
|---|
| 3963 | {
|
|---|
| 3964 | }
|
|---|
| 3965 |
|
|---|
| 3966 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3967 | \internal
|
|---|
| 3968 | */
|
|---|
| 3969 | QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox(int version)
|
|---|
| 3970 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ToolBox)
|
|---|
| 3971 | {
|
|---|
| 3972 | }
|
|---|
| 3973 |
|
|---|
| 3974 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3975 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBox::QStyleOptionToolBox(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other)
|
|---|
| 3976 |
|
|---|
| 3977 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 3978 | */
|
|---|
| 3979 |
|
|---|
| 3980 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3981 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBox::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 3982 |
|
|---|
| 3983 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 3984 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 3985 |
|
|---|
| 3986 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ToolBox} for this class).
|
|---|
| 3987 |
|
|---|
| 3988 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 3989 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 3990 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 3991 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 3992 |
|
|---|
| 3993 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3994 | */
|
|---|
| 3995 |
|
|---|
| 3996 | /*!
|
|---|
| 3997 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBox::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 3998 |
|
|---|
| 3999 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4000 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4001 |
|
|---|
| 4002 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4003 |
|
|---|
| 4004 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4005 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4006 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4007 |
|
|---|
| 4008 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4009 | */
|
|---|
| 4010 |
|
|---|
| 4011 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4012 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBox::icon
|
|---|
| 4013 | \brief the icon for the tool box tab
|
|---|
| 4014 |
|
|---|
| 4015 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 4016 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 4017 | */
|
|---|
| 4018 |
|
|---|
| 4019 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4020 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBox::text
|
|---|
| 4021 | \brief the text for the tool box tab
|
|---|
| 4022 |
|
|---|
| 4023 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 4024 | */
|
|---|
| 4025 |
|
|---|
| 4026 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4027 | \class QStyleOptionToolBoxV2
|
|---|
| 4028 | \brief The QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class is used to describe the parameters necessary for drawing a frame in Qt 4.3 or above.
|
|---|
| 4029 |
|
|---|
| 4030 | \since 4.3
|
|---|
| 4031 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 inherits QStyleOptionToolBox which is used for
|
|---|
| 4032 | drawing the tabs in a QToolBox.
|
|---|
| 4033 |
|
|---|
| 4034 | An instance of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 class has
|
|---|
| 4035 | \l{QStyleOption::type} {type} SO_ToolBox and
|
|---|
| 4036 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} 2. The type is used
|
|---|
| 4037 | internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4038 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4039 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4040 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles. The
|
|---|
| 4041 | version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 4042 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast(),
|
|---|
| 4043 | you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4044 |
|
|---|
| 4045 | If you create your own QStyle subclass, you should handle both
|
|---|
| 4046 | QStyleOptionToolBox and QStyleOptionToolBoxV2.
|
|---|
| 4047 |
|
|---|
| 4048 | \sa QStyleOptionToolBox, QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 4049 | */
|
|---|
| 4050 |
|
|---|
| 4051 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4052 | Contsructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 object.
|
|---|
| 4053 | */
|
|---|
| 4054 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2()
|
|---|
| 4055 | : QStyleOptionToolBox(Version), position(Beginning), selectedPosition(NotAdjacent)
|
|---|
| 4056 | {
|
|---|
| 4057 | }
|
|---|
| 4058 |
|
|---|
| 4059 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4060 | \fn QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 4061 |
|
|---|
| 4062 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 4063 | */
|
|---|
| 4064 |
|
|---|
| 4065 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4066 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4067 | */
|
|---|
| 4068 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 4069 | : QStyleOptionToolBox(version), position(Beginning), selectedPosition(NotAdjacent)
|
|---|
| 4070 | {
|
|---|
| 4071 | }
|
|---|
| 4072 |
|
|---|
| 4073 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4074 | Constructs a QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 4075 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 or
|
|---|
| 4076 | QStyleOptionToolBox types.
|
|---|
| 4077 |
|
|---|
| 4078 | If the \a other style option's version is 1, the new style
|
|---|
| 4079 | option's \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} value is set to
|
|---|
| 4080 | \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::Beginning and \l selectedPosition is set
|
|---|
| 4081 | to \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::NotAdjacent. If its version is 2, the
|
|---|
| 4082 | \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} selectedPosition values
|
|---|
| 4083 | are simply copied to the new style option.
|
|---|
| 4084 |
|
|---|
| 4085 | \sa version
|
|---|
| 4086 | */
|
|---|
| 4087 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::QStyleOptionToolBoxV2(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other)
|
|---|
| 4088 | {
|
|---|
| 4089 | QStyleOptionToolBox::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 4090 |
|
|---|
| 4091 | const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 4092 | position = f2 ? f2->position : Beginning;
|
|---|
| 4093 | selectedPosition = f2 ? f2->selectedPosition : NotAdjacent;
|
|---|
| 4094 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 4095 | }
|
|---|
| 4096 |
|
|---|
| 4097 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4098 | Assigns the \a other style option to this style option. The \a
|
|---|
| 4099 | other style option can be either of the QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 or
|
|---|
| 4100 | QStyleOptionToolBox types.
|
|---|
| 4101 |
|
|---|
| 4102 | If the \a{other} style option's version is 1, this style option's
|
|---|
| 4103 | \l{QStyleOptionTab::position} {position} and \l selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 4104 | values are set to \l QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::Beginning and \l
|
|---|
| 4105 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::NotAdjacent respectively. If its
|
|---|
| 4106 | \l{QStyleOption::version} {version} is 2, these values are simply
|
|---|
| 4107 | copied to this style option.
|
|---|
| 4108 | */
|
|---|
| 4109 | QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 &QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::operator=(const QStyleOptionToolBox &other)
|
|---|
| 4110 | {
|
|---|
| 4111 | QStyleOptionToolBox::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 4112 |
|
|---|
| 4113 | const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *f2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionToolBoxV2 *>(&other);
|
|---|
| 4114 | position = f2 ? f2->position : Beginning;
|
|---|
| 4115 | selectedPosition = f2 ? f2->selectedPosition : NotAdjacent;
|
|---|
| 4116 | version = Version;
|
|---|
| 4117 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 4118 | }
|
|---|
| 4119 |
|
|---|
| 4120 |
|
|---|
| 4121 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4122 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::SelectedPosition
|
|---|
| 4123 |
|
|---|
| 4124 | This enum describes the position of the selected tab. Some styles
|
|---|
| 4125 | need to draw a tab differently depending on whether or not it is
|
|---|
| 4126 | adjacent to the selected tab.
|
|---|
| 4127 |
|
|---|
| 4128 | \value NotAdjacent The tab is not adjacent to a selected tab (or is the selected tab).
|
|---|
| 4129 | \value NextIsSelected The next tab (typically the tab on the right) is selected.
|
|---|
| 4130 | \value PreviousIsSelected The previous tab (typically the tab on the left) is selected.
|
|---|
| 4131 |
|
|---|
| 4132 | \sa selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 4133 | */
|
|---|
| 4134 |
|
|---|
| 4135 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4136 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4137 |
|
|---|
| 4138 | This enum holds the version of this style option
|
|---|
| 4139 |
|
|---|
| 4140 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 4141 | */
|
|---|
| 4142 |
|
|---|
| 4143 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4144 | \enum QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::TabPosition
|
|---|
| 4145 |
|
|---|
| 4146 | This enum describes tab positions relative to other tabs.
|
|---|
| 4147 |
|
|---|
| 4148 | \value Beginning The tab is the first (i.e., top-most) tab in
|
|---|
| 4149 | the toolbox.
|
|---|
| 4150 | \value Middle The tab is placed in the middle of the toolbox.
|
|---|
| 4151 | \value End The tab is placed at the bottom of the toolbox.
|
|---|
| 4152 | \value OnlyOneTab There is only one tab in the toolbox.
|
|---|
| 4153 | */
|
|---|
| 4154 |
|
|---|
| 4155 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4156 | \variable QStyleOptionToolBoxV2::selectedPosition
|
|---|
| 4157 | \brief the position of the selected tab in relation to this tab
|
|---|
| 4158 |
|
|---|
| 4159 | The default value is NotAdjacent, i.e. the tab is not adjacent to
|
|---|
| 4160 | a selected tab nor is it the selected tab.
|
|---|
| 4161 | */
|
|---|
| 4162 |
|
|---|
| 4163 | #ifndef QT_NO_RUBBERBAND
|
|---|
| 4164 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4165 | \class QStyleOptionRubberBand
|
|---|
| 4166 | \brief The QStyleOptionRubberBand class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 4167 | parameters needed for drawing a rubber band.
|
|---|
| 4168 |
|
|---|
| 4169 | QStyleOptionRubberBand contains all the information that
|
|---|
| 4170 | QStyle functions need to draw QRubberBand.
|
|---|
| 4171 |
|
|---|
| 4172 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4173 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4174 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4175 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4176 |
|
|---|
| 4177 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4178 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4179 |
|
|---|
| 4180 | \sa QStyleOption, QRubberBand
|
|---|
| 4181 | */
|
|---|
| 4182 |
|
|---|
| 4183 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4184 | Creates a QStyleOptionRubberBand, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4185 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4186 | */
|
|---|
| 4187 |
|
|---|
| 4188 | QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand()
|
|---|
| 4189 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_RubberBand), shape(QRubberBand::Line), opaque(false)
|
|---|
| 4190 | {
|
|---|
| 4191 | }
|
|---|
| 4192 |
|
|---|
| 4193 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4194 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4195 | */
|
|---|
| 4196 | QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand(int version)
|
|---|
| 4197 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_RubberBand), shape(QRubberBand::Line), opaque(false)
|
|---|
| 4198 | {
|
|---|
| 4199 | }
|
|---|
| 4200 |
|
|---|
| 4201 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4202 | \fn QStyleOptionRubberBand::QStyleOptionRubberBand(const QStyleOptionRubberBand &other)
|
|---|
| 4203 |
|
|---|
| 4204 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 4205 | */
|
|---|
| 4206 |
|
|---|
| 4207 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4208 | \enum QStyleOptionRubberBand::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4209 |
|
|---|
| 4210 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4211 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4212 |
|
|---|
| 4213 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_RubberBand} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4214 |
|
|---|
| 4215 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4216 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4217 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4218 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4219 |
|
|---|
| 4220 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4221 | */
|
|---|
| 4222 |
|
|---|
| 4223 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4224 | \enum QStyleOptionRubberBand::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4225 |
|
|---|
| 4226 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4227 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4228 |
|
|---|
| 4229 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4230 |
|
|---|
| 4231 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4232 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4233 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4234 |
|
|---|
| 4235 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4236 | */
|
|---|
| 4237 |
|
|---|
| 4238 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4239 | \variable QStyleOptionRubberBand::shape
|
|---|
| 4240 | \brief the shape of the rubber band
|
|---|
| 4241 |
|
|---|
| 4242 | The default shape is QRubberBand::Line.
|
|---|
| 4243 | */
|
|---|
| 4244 |
|
|---|
| 4245 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4246 | \variable QStyleOptionRubberBand::opaque
|
|---|
| 4247 | \brief whether the rubber band is required to be drawn in an opaque style
|
|---|
| 4248 |
|
|---|
| 4249 | The default value is true.
|
|---|
| 4250 | */
|
|---|
| 4251 | #endif // QT_NO_RUBBERBAND
|
|---|
| 4252 |
|
|---|
| 4253 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4254 | \class QStyleOptionTitleBar
|
|---|
| 4255 | \brief The QStyleOptionTitleBar class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 4256 | parameters for drawing a title bar.
|
|---|
| 4257 |
|
|---|
| 4258 | QStyleOptionTitleBar contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 4259 | functions need to draw the title bars of QWorkspace's MDI
|
|---|
| 4260 | children.
|
|---|
| 4261 |
|
|---|
| 4262 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4263 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4264 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4265 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4266 |
|
|---|
| 4267 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4268 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4269 |
|
|---|
| 4270 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QWorkspace
|
|---|
| 4271 | */
|
|---|
| 4272 |
|
|---|
| 4273 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4274 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTitleBar, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4275 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4276 | */
|
|---|
| 4277 |
|
|---|
| 4278 | QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar()
|
|---|
| 4279 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, SO_TitleBar), titleBarState(0), titleBarFlags(0)
|
|---|
| 4280 | {
|
|---|
| 4281 | }
|
|---|
| 4282 |
|
|---|
| 4283 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4284 | \fn QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar(const QStyleOptionTitleBar &other)
|
|---|
| 4285 |
|
|---|
| 4286 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 4287 | */
|
|---|
| 4288 |
|
|---|
| 4289 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4290 | \enum QStyleOptionTitleBar::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4291 |
|
|---|
| 4292 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4293 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4294 |
|
|---|
| 4295 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TitleBar} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4296 |
|
|---|
| 4297 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4298 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4299 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4300 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4301 |
|
|---|
| 4302 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4303 | */
|
|---|
| 4304 |
|
|---|
| 4305 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4306 | \enum QStyleOptionTitleBar::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4307 |
|
|---|
| 4308 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4309 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4310 |
|
|---|
| 4311 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4312 |
|
|---|
| 4313 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4314 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4315 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4316 |
|
|---|
| 4317 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4318 | */
|
|---|
| 4319 |
|
|---|
| 4320 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4321 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4322 | */
|
|---|
| 4323 | QStyleOptionTitleBar::QStyleOptionTitleBar(int version)
|
|---|
| 4324 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, SO_TitleBar), titleBarState(0), titleBarFlags(0)
|
|---|
| 4325 | {
|
|---|
| 4326 | }
|
|---|
| 4327 |
|
|---|
| 4328 |
|
|---|
| 4329 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4330 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::text
|
|---|
| 4331 | \brief the text of the title bar
|
|---|
| 4332 |
|
|---|
| 4333 | The default value is an empty string.
|
|---|
| 4334 | */
|
|---|
| 4335 |
|
|---|
| 4336 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4337 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::icon
|
|---|
| 4338 | \brief the icon for the title bar
|
|---|
| 4339 |
|
|---|
| 4340 | The default value is an empty icon, i.e. an icon with neither a
|
|---|
| 4341 | pixmap nor a filename.
|
|---|
| 4342 | */
|
|---|
| 4343 |
|
|---|
| 4344 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4345 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::titleBarState
|
|---|
| 4346 | \brief the state of the title bar
|
|---|
| 4347 |
|
|---|
| 4348 | This is basically the window state of the underlying widget. The
|
|---|
| 4349 | default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 4350 |
|
|---|
| 4351 | \sa QWidget::windowState()
|
|---|
| 4352 | */
|
|---|
| 4353 |
|
|---|
| 4354 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4355 | \variable QStyleOptionTitleBar::titleBarFlags
|
|---|
| 4356 | \brief the widget flags for the title bar
|
|---|
| 4357 |
|
|---|
| 4358 | The default value is Qt::Widget.
|
|---|
| 4359 |
|
|---|
| 4360 | \sa Qt::WindowFlags
|
|---|
| 4361 | */
|
|---|
| 4362 |
|
|---|
| 4363 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4364 | \class QStyleOptionViewItem
|
|---|
| 4365 | \brief The QStyleOptionViewItem class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 4366 | parameters used to draw an item in a view widget.
|
|---|
| 4367 |
|
|---|
| 4368 | QStyleOptionViewItem contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 4369 | functions need to draw the items for Qt's model/view classes.
|
|---|
| 4370 |
|
|---|
| 4371 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4372 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4373 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4374 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4375 |
|
|---|
| 4376 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4377 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4378 |
|
|---|
| 4379 | \sa QStyleOption, {model-view-programming.html}{Model/View
|
|---|
| 4380 | Programming}
|
|---|
| 4381 | */
|
|---|
| 4382 |
|
|---|
| 4383 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4384 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::Position
|
|---|
| 4385 |
|
|---|
| 4386 | This enum describes the position of the item's decoration.
|
|---|
| 4387 |
|
|---|
| 4388 | \value Left On the left of the text.
|
|---|
| 4389 | \value Right On the right of the text.
|
|---|
| 4390 | \value Top Above the text.
|
|---|
| 4391 | \value Bottom Below the text.
|
|---|
| 4392 |
|
|---|
| 4393 | \sa decorationPosition
|
|---|
| 4394 | */
|
|---|
| 4395 |
|
|---|
| 4396 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4397 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::showDecorationSelected
|
|---|
| 4398 | \brief whether the decoration should be highlighted on selected
|
|---|
| 4399 | items
|
|---|
| 4400 |
|
|---|
| 4401 | If this option is true, the branch and any decorations on selected items
|
|---|
| 4402 | should be highlighted, indicating that the item is selected; otherwise, no
|
|---|
| 4403 | highlighting is required. The default value is false.
|
|---|
| 4404 |
|
|---|
| 4405 | \sa QStyle::SH_ItemView_ShowDecorationSelected, QAbstractItemView
|
|---|
| 4406 | */
|
|---|
| 4407 |
|
|---|
| 4408 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4409 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::textElideMode
|
|---|
| 4410 | \brief where ellipsis should be added for text that is too long to fit
|
|---|
| 4411 | into an item
|
|---|
| 4412 |
|
|---|
| 4413 | The default value is Qt::ElideMiddle, i.e. the ellipsis appears in
|
|---|
| 4414 | the middle of the text.
|
|---|
| 4415 |
|
|---|
| 4416 | \sa Qt::TextElideMode, QStyle::SH_ItemView_EllipsisLocation
|
|---|
| 4417 | */
|
|---|
| 4418 |
|
|---|
| 4419 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4420 | Constructs a QStyleOptionViewItem, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4421 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4422 | */
|
|---|
| 4423 |
|
|---|
| 4424 | QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem()
|
|---|
| 4425 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_ViewItem),
|
|---|
| 4426 | displayAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), decorationAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft),
|
|---|
| 4427 | textElideMode(Qt::ElideMiddle), decorationPosition(Left),
|
|---|
| 4428 | showDecorationSelected(false)
|
|---|
| 4429 | {
|
|---|
| 4430 | }
|
|---|
| 4431 |
|
|---|
| 4432 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4433 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4434 | */
|
|---|
| 4435 | QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem(int version)
|
|---|
| 4436 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_ViewItem),
|
|---|
| 4437 | displayAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft), decorationAlignment(Qt::AlignLeft),
|
|---|
| 4438 | textElideMode(Qt::ElideMiddle), decorationPosition(Left),
|
|---|
| 4439 | showDecorationSelected(false)
|
|---|
| 4440 | {
|
|---|
| 4441 | }
|
|---|
| 4442 |
|
|---|
| 4443 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4444 | \fn QStyleOptionViewItem::QStyleOptionViewItem(const QStyleOptionViewItem &other)
|
|---|
| 4445 |
|
|---|
| 4446 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 4447 | */
|
|---|
| 4448 |
|
|---|
| 4449 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4450 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4451 |
|
|---|
| 4452 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4453 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4454 |
|
|---|
| 4455 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_ViewItem} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4456 |
|
|---|
| 4457 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4458 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4459 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4460 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4461 |
|
|---|
| 4462 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4463 | */
|
|---|
| 4464 |
|
|---|
| 4465 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4466 | \enum QStyleOptionViewItem::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4467 |
|
|---|
| 4468 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4469 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4470 |
|
|---|
| 4471 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4472 |
|
|---|
| 4473 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4474 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4475 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4476 |
|
|---|
| 4477 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4478 | */
|
|---|
| 4479 |
|
|---|
| 4480 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4481 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::displayAlignment
|
|---|
| 4482 | \brief the alignment of the display value for the item
|
|---|
| 4483 |
|
|---|
| 4484 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 4485 | */
|
|---|
| 4486 |
|
|---|
| 4487 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4488 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationAlignment
|
|---|
| 4489 | \brief the alignment of the decoration for the item
|
|---|
| 4490 |
|
|---|
| 4491 | The default value is Qt::AlignLeft.
|
|---|
| 4492 | */
|
|---|
| 4493 |
|
|---|
| 4494 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4495 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationPosition
|
|---|
| 4496 | \brief the position of the decoration for the item
|
|---|
| 4497 |
|
|---|
| 4498 | The default value is \l Left.
|
|---|
| 4499 |
|
|---|
| 4500 | \sa Position
|
|---|
| 4501 | */
|
|---|
| 4502 |
|
|---|
| 4503 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4504 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::decorationSize
|
|---|
| 4505 | \brief the size of the decoration for the item
|
|---|
| 4506 |
|
|---|
| 4507 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 4508 |
|
|---|
| 4509 | \sa decorationAlignment, decorationPosition
|
|---|
| 4510 | */
|
|---|
| 4511 |
|
|---|
| 4512 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4513 | \variable QStyleOptionViewItem::font
|
|---|
| 4514 | \brief the font used for the item
|
|---|
| 4515 |
|
|---|
| 4516 | By default, the application's default font is used.
|
|---|
| 4517 |
|
|---|
| 4518 | \sa QFont
|
|---|
| 4519 | */
|
|---|
| 4520 |
|
|---|
| 4521 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4522 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(const QStyleOption *option)
|
|---|
| 4523 | \relates QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 4524 |
|
|---|
| 4525 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the \l{QStyleOption::type}{type} and
|
|---|
| 4526 | \l{QStyleOption::version}{version} of the given \a option.
|
|---|
| 4527 |
|
|---|
| 4528 | Example:
|
|---|
| 4529 |
|
|---|
| 4530 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/qstyleoption/main.cpp 4
|
|---|
| 4531 |
|
|---|
| 4532 | \sa QStyleOption::type, QStyleOption::version
|
|---|
| 4533 | */
|
|---|
| 4534 |
|
|---|
| 4535 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4536 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(QStyleOption *option)
|
|---|
| 4537 | \overload
|
|---|
| 4538 | \relates QStyleOption
|
|---|
| 4539 |
|
|---|
| 4540 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the type of the given \a option.
|
|---|
| 4541 | */
|
|---|
| 4542 |
|
|---|
| 4543 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABWIDGET
|
|---|
| 4544 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4545 | \class QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame
|
|---|
| 4546 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 4547 | parameters for drawing the frame around a tab widget.
|
|---|
| 4548 |
|
|---|
| 4549 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame contains all the information that
|
|---|
| 4550 | QStyle functions need to draw the frame around QTabWidget.
|
|---|
| 4551 |
|
|---|
| 4552 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4553 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4554 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4555 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4556 |
|
|---|
| 4557 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4558 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4559 |
|
|---|
| 4560 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabWidget
|
|---|
| 4561 | */
|
|---|
| 4562 |
|
|---|
| 4563 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4564 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4565 | variables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4566 | */
|
|---|
| 4567 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame()
|
|---|
| 4568 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_TabWidgetFrame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0),
|
|---|
| 4569 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth)
|
|---|
| 4570 | {
|
|---|
| 4571 | }
|
|---|
| 4572 |
|
|---|
| 4573 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4574 | \fn QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(const QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame &other)
|
|---|
| 4575 |
|
|---|
| 4576 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 4577 | */
|
|---|
| 4578 |
|
|---|
| 4579 | /*! \internal */
|
|---|
| 4580 | QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame(int version)
|
|---|
| 4581 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_TabWidgetFrame), lineWidth(0), midLineWidth(0),
|
|---|
| 4582 | shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth)
|
|---|
| 4583 | {
|
|---|
| 4584 | }
|
|---|
| 4585 |
|
|---|
| 4586 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4587 | \enum QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4588 |
|
|---|
| 4589 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4590 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4591 |
|
|---|
| 4592 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabWidgetFrame} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4593 |
|
|---|
| 4594 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4595 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4596 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4597 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4598 |
|
|---|
| 4599 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4600 | */
|
|---|
| 4601 |
|
|---|
| 4602 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4603 | \enum QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4604 |
|
|---|
| 4605 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4606 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4607 |
|
|---|
| 4608 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4609 |
|
|---|
| 4610 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4611 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4612 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4613 |
|
|---|
| 4614 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4615 | */
|
|---|
| 4616 |
|
|---|
| 4617 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4618 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::lineWidth
|
|---|
| 4619 | \brief the line width for drawing the panel
|
|---|
| 4620 |
|
|---|
| 4621 | The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 4622 | */
|
|---|
| 4623 |
|
|---|
| 4624 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4625 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::midLineWidth
|
|---|
| 4626 | \brief the mid-line width for drawing the panel
|
|---|
| 4627 |
|
|---|
| 4628 | The mid line width is usually used in drawing sunken or raised
|
|---|
| 4629 | frames. The default value is 0.
|
|---|
| 4630 | */
|
|---|
| 4631 |
|
|---|
| 4632 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4633 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::shape
|
|---|
| 4634 | \brief the tab shape used to draw the tabs
|
|---|
| 4635 |
|
|---|
| 4636 | The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth.
|
|---|
| 4637 | */
|
|---|
| 4638 |
|
|---|
| 4639 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4640 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::tabBarSize
|
|---|
| 4641 | \brief the size of the tab bar
|
|---|
| 4642 |
|
|---|
| 4643 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 4644 | */
|
|---|
| 4645 |
|
|---|
| 4646 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4647 | \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::rightCornerWidgetSize
|
|---|
| 4648 | \brief the size of the right-corner widget
|
|---|
| 4649 |
|
|---|
| 4650 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 4651 | */
|
|---|
| 4652 |
|
|---|
| 4653 | /*! \variable QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame::leftCornerWidgetSize
|
|---|
| 4654 | \brief the size of the left-corner widget
|
|---|
| 4655 |
|
|---|
| 4656 | The default value is QSize(-1, -1), i.e. an invalid size.
|
|---|
| 4657 | */
|
|---|
| 4658 | #endif // QT_NO_TABWIDGET
|
|---|
| 4659 |
|
|---|
| 4660 | #ifndef QT_NO_TABBAR
|
|---|
| 4661 |
|
|---|
| 4662 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4663 | \class QStyleOptionTabBarBase
|
|---|
| 4664 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabBarBase class is used to describe
|
|---|
| 4665 | the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually
|
|---|
| 4666 | overlaps with.
|
|---|
| 4667 |
|
|---|
| 4668 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 4669 | functions need to draw the tab bar base. Note that this is only
|
|---|
| 4670 | drawn for a standalone QTabBar (one that isn't part of a
|
|---|
| 4671 | QTabWidget).
|
|---|
| 4672 |
|
|---|
| 4673 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4674 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4675 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4676 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4677 |
|
|---|
| 4678 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4679 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4680 |
|
|---|
| 4681 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabBar::drawBase()
|
|---|
| 4682 | */
|
|---|
| 4683 |
|
|---|
| 4684 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4685 | Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBase, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4686 | vaiables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4687 | */
|
|---|
| 4688 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase()
|
|---|
| 4689 | : QStyleOption(Version, SO_TabBarBase), shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth)
|
|---|
| 4690 | {
|
|---|
| 4691 | }
|
|---|
| 4692 |
|
|---|
| 4693 | /*! \internal */
|
|---|
| 4694 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase(int version)
|
|---|
| 4695 | : QStyleOption(version, SO_TabBarBase), shape(QTabBar::RoundedNorth)
|
|---|
| 4696 | {
|
|---|
| 4697 | }
|
|---|
| 4698 |
|
|---|
| 4699 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4700 | \fn QStyleOptionTabBarBase::QStyleOptionTabBarBase(const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other)
|
|---|
| 4701 |
|
|---|
| 4702 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 4703 | */
|
|---|
| 4704 |
|
|---|
| 4705 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4706 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBase::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4707 |
|
|---|
| 4708 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4709 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4710 |
|
|---|
| 4711 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabBarBase} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4712 |
|
|---|
| 4713 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4714 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4715 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4716 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4717 |
|
|---|
| 4718 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4719 | */
|
|---|
| 4720 |
|
|---|
| 4721 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4722 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBase::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4723 |
|
|---|
| 4724 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4725 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4726 |
|
|---|
| 4727 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4728 |
|
|---|
| 4729 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4730 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4731 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4732 |
|
|---|
| 4733 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4734 | */
|
|---|
| 4735 |
|
|---|
| 4736 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4737 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::shape
|
|---|
| 4738 | \brief the shape of the tab bar
|
|---|
| 4739 |
|
|---|
| 4740 | The default value is QTabBar::RoundedNorth.
|
|---|
| 4741 | */
|
|---|
| 4742 |
|
|---|
| 4743 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4744 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::tabBarRect
|
|---|
| 4745 | \brief the rectangle containing all the tabs
|
|---|
| 4746 |
|
|---|
| 4747 | The default value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both
|
|---|
| 4748 | the width and the height set to 0.
|
|---|
| 4749 | */
|
|---|
| 4750 |
|
|---|
| 4751 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4752 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBase::selectedTabRect
|
|---|
| 4753 | \brief the rectangle containing the selected tab
|
|---|
| 4754 |
|
|---|
| 4755 | This rectangle is contained within the tabBarRect. The default
|
|---|
| 4756 | value is a null rectangle, i.e. a rectangle with both the width
|
|---|
| 4757 | and the height set to 0.
|
|---|
| 4758 | */
|
|---|
| 4759 |
|
|---|
| 4760 |
|
|---|
| 4761 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4762 | \class QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2
|
|---|
| 4763 | \brief The QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 class is used to describe
|
|---|
| 4764 | the base of a tab bar, i.e. the part that the tab bar usually
|
|---|
| 4765 | overlaps with.
|
|---|
| 4766 | \since 4.5
|
|---|
| 4767 |
|
|---|
| 4768 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 4769 | functions need to draw the tab bar base.
|
|---|
| 4770 |
|
|---|
| 4771 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4772 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4773 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4774 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4775 |
|
|---|
| 4776 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4777 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4778 |
|
|---|
| 4779 | \sa QStyleOption, QTabBar::drawBase()
|
|---|
| 4780 | */
|
|---|
| 4781 |
|
|---|
| 4782 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4783 | \enum QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4784 |
|
|---|
| 4785 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4786 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4787 |
|
|---|
| 4788 | \value Version 2
|
|---|
| 4789 |
|
|---|
| 4790 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4791 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4792 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4793 |
|
|---|
| 4794 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4795 | */
|
|---|
| 4796 |
|
|---|
| 4797 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4798 | \variable QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::documentMode
|
|---|
| 4799 | \brief whether the tabbar is in document mode.
|
|---|
| 4800 |
|
|---|
| 4801 | The default value is false;
|
|---|
| 4802 | */
|
|---|
| 4803 |
|
|---|
| 4804 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4805 | Construct a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, initializing the members
|
|---|
| 4806 | vaiables to their default values.
|
|---|
| 4807 | */
|
|---|
| 4808 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2()
|
|---|
| 4809 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(Version)
|
|---|
| 4810 | , documentMode(false)
|
|---|
| 4811 | {
|
|---|
| 4812 | }
|
|---|
| 4813 |
|
|---|
| 4814 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4815 | \fn QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 &other)
|
|---|
| 4816 |
|
|---|
| 4817 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 4818 | */
|
|---|
| 4819 |
|
|---|
| 4820 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4821 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 4822 | */
|
|---|
| 4823 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other)
|
|---|
| 4824 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(Version)
|
|---|
| 4825 | {
|
|---|
| 4826 | (void)QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 4827 | }
|
|---|
| 4828 |
|
|---|
| 4829 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4830 | Constructs a QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 copy of the \a other style option
|
|---|
| 4831 | which can be either of the QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2, or QStyleOptionTabBarBase types.
|
|---|
| 4832 |
|
|---|
| 4833 | If the other style option's version is not 1, the new style option's
|
|---|
| 4834 | \c documentMode is set to false. If its version is 2, its \c documentMode value
|
|---|
| 4835 | is simply copied to the new style option.
|
|---|
| 4836 | */
|
|---|
| 4837 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 &QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::operator = (const QStyleOptionTabBarBase &other)
|
|---|
| 4838 | {
|
|---|
| 4839 | QStyleOptionTabBarBase::operator=(other);
|
|---|
| 4840 | const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2 *v2 = qstyleoption_cast<const QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2*>(&other);
|
|---|
| 4841 | documentMode = v2 ? v2->documentMode : false;
|
|---|
| 4842 | return *this;
|
|---|
| 4843 | }
|
|---|
| 4844 |
|
|---|
| 4845 | /*! \internal */
|
|---|
| 4846 | QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2::QStyleOptionTabBarBaseV2(int version)
|
|---|
| 4847 | : QStyleOptionTabBarBase(version)
|
|---|
| 4848 | {
|
|---|
| 4849 | }
|
|---|
| 4850 |
|
|---|
| 4851 | #endif // QT_NO_TABBAR
|
|---|
| 4852 |
|
|---|
| 4853 | #ifndef QT_NO_SIZEGRIP
|
|---|
| 4854 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4855 | \class QStyleOptionSizeGrip
|
|---|
| 4856 | \brief The QStyleOptionSizeGrip class is used to describe the
|
|---|
| 4857 | parameter for drawing a size grip.
|
|---|
| 4858 | \since 4.2
|
|---|
| 4859 |
|
|---|
| 4860 | QStyleOptionButton contains all the information that QStyle
|
|---|
| 4861 | functions need to draw QSizeGrip.
|
|---|
| 4862 |
|
|---|
| 4863 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4864 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4865 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4866 | these are simply parameters used by the style functions.
|
|---|
| 4867 |
|
|---|
| 4868 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4869 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4870 |
|
|---|
| 4871 | \sa QStyleOption, QStyleOptionComplex, QSizeGrip
|
|---|
| 4872 | */
|
|---|
| 4873 |
|
|---|
| 4874 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4875 | Constructs a QStyleOptionSizeGrip.
|
|---|
| 4876 | */
|
|---|
| 4877 | QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip()
|
|---|
| 4878 | : QStyleOptionComplex(Version, Type), corner(Qt::BottomRightCorner)
|
|---|
| 4879 | {
|
|---|
| 4880 | }
|
|---|
| 4881 |
|
|---|
| 4882 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4883 | \fn QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip(const QStyleOptionSizeGrip &other)
|
|---|
| 4884 |
|
|---|
| 4885 | Constructs a copy of the \a other style option.
|
|---|
| 4886 | */
|
|---|
| 4887 |
|
|---|
| 4888 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4889 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4890 | */
|
|---|
| 4891 | QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip(int version)
|
|---|
| 4892 | : QStyleOptionComplex(version, Type), corner(Qt::BottomRightCorner)
|
|---|
| 4893 | {
|
|---|
| 4894 | }
|
|---|
| 4895 |
|
|---|
| 4896 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4897 | \variable QStyleOptionSizeGrip::corner
|
|---|
| 4898 |
|
|---|
| 4899 | The corner in which the size grip is located.
|
|---|
| 4900 | */
|
|---|
| 4901 |
|
|---|
| 4902 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4903 | \enum QStyleOptionSizeGrip::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4904 |
|
|---|
| 4905 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4906 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4907 |
|
|---|
| 4908 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SO_TabBarBase} for this class).
|
|---|
| 4909 |
|
|---|
| 4910 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4911 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4912 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4913 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4914 |
|
|---|
| 4915 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4916 | */
|
|---|
| 4917 |
|
|---|
| 4918 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4919 | \enum QStyleOptionSizeGrip::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4920 |
|
|---|
| 4921 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4922 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4923 |
|
|---|
| 4924 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4925 |
|
|---|
| 4926 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4927 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4928 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4929 |
|
|---|
| 4930 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4931 | */
|
|---|
| 4932 | #endif // QT_NO_SIZEGRIP
|
|---|
| 4933 |
|
|---|
| 4934 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4935 | \class QStyleOptionGraphicsItem
|
|---|
| 4936 | \brief The QStyleOptionGraphicsItem class is used to describe
|
|---|
| 4937 | the parameters needed to draw a QGraphicsItem.
|
|---|
| 4938 | \since 4.2
|
|---|
| 4939 | \ingroup multimedia
|
|---|
| 4940 |
|
|---|
| 4941 | For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is
|
|---|
| 4942 | direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel
|
|---|
| 4943 | makes the structures straightforward to use and emphasizes that
|
|---|
| 4944 | these are simply parameters.
|
|---|
| 4945 |
|
|---|
| 4946 | For an example demonstrating how style options can be used, see
|
|---|
| 4947 | the \l {widgets/styles}{Styles} example.
|
|---|
| 4948 |
|
|---|
| 4949 | \sa QStyleOption, QGraphicsItem::paint()
|
|---|
| 4950 | */
|
|---|
| 4951 |
|
|---|
| 4952 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4953 | \enum QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4954 |
|
|---|
| 4955 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4956 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4957 |
|
|---|
| 4958 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l SO_GraphicsItem for this class).
|
|---|
| 4959 |
|
|---|
| 4960 | The type is used internally by QStyleOption, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 4961 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 4962 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 4963 | create your own QStyleOption subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 4964 |
|
|---|
| 4965 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4966 | */
|
|---|
| 4967 |
|
|---|
| 4968 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4969 | \enum QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 4970 |
|
|---|
| 4971 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 4972 | is defined for each QStyleOption subclass.
|
|---|
| 4973 |
|
|---|
| 4974 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 4975 |
|
|---|
| 4976 | The version is used by QStyleOption subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 4977 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 4978 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 4979 |
|
|---|
| 4980 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 4981 | */
|
|---|
| 4982 |
|
|---|
| 4983 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4984 | Constructs a QStyleOptionGraphicsItem. The levelOfDetail parameter is
|
|---|
| 4985 | initialized to 1.
|
|---|
| 4986 | */
|
|---|
| 4987 | QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem()
|
|---|
| 4988 | : QStyleOption(Version, Type), levelOfDetail(1)
|
|---|
| 4989 | {
|
|---|
| 4990 | }
|
|---|
| 4991 |
|
|---|
| 4992 | /*!
|
|---|
| 4993 | \internal
|
|---|
| 4994 | */
|
|---|
| 4995 | QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem(int version)
|
|---|
| 4996 | : QStyleOption(version, Type), levelOfDetail(1)
|
|---|
| 4997 | {
|
|---|
| 4998 | }
|
|---|
| 4999 |
|
|---|
| 5000 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5001 | \fn QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::QStyleOptionGraphicsItem(const QStyleOptionGraphicsItem &other)
|
|---|
| 5002 |
|
|---|
| 5003 | Constructs a copy of \a other.
|
|---|
| 5004 | */
|
|---|
| 5005 |
|
|---|
| 5006 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5007 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::exposedRect
|
|---|
| 5008 | \brief the exposed rectangle, in item coordinates
|
|---|
| 5009 |
|
|---|
| 5010 | Make use of this rectangle to speed up item drawing when only parts of the
|
|---|
| 5011 | item are exposed. If the whole item is exposed, this rectangle will be the
|
|---|
| 5012 | same as QGraphicsItem::boundingRect().
|
|---|
| 5013 | */
|
|---|
| 5014 |
|
|---|
| 5015 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5016 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::matrix
|
|---|
| 5017 | \brief the complete transformation matrix for the item
|
|---|
| 5018 |
|
|---|
| 5019 | This matrix is the sum of the item's scene matrix and the matrix of the
|
|---|
| 5020 | painter used for drawing the item. It is provided for convenience,
|
|---|
| 5021 | allowing anvanced level-of-detail metrics that can be used to speed up
|
|---|
| 5022 | item drawing.
|
|---|
| 5023 |
|
|---|
| 5024 | To find the dimentions of an item in screen coordinates (i.e., pixels),
|
|---|
| 5025 | you can use the mapping functions of QMatrix, such as QMatrix::map().
|
|---|
| 5026 |
|
|---|
| 5027 | \sa QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetail
|
|---|
| 5028 | */
|
|---|
| 5029 |
|
|---|
| 5030 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5031 | \variable QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::levelOfDetail
|
|---|
| 5032 | \brief a simple metric for determining an item's level of detail
|
|---|
| 5033 |
|
|---|
| 5034 | This simple metric provides an easy way to determine the level of detail
|
|---|
| 5035 | for an item. Its value represents the maximum value of the height and
|
|---|
| 5036 | width of a unity rectangle, mapped using the complete transformation
|
|---|
| 5037 | matrix of the painter used to draw the item. By default, if no
|
|---|
| 5038 | transformations are applied, its value is 1. If zoomed out 1:2, the level
|
|---|
| 5039 | of detail will be 0.5, and if zoomed in 2:1, its value is 2.
|
|---|
| 5040 |
|
|---|
| 5041 | For more advanced level-of-detail metrics, use
|
|---|
| 5042 | QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::matrix directly.
|
|---|
| 5043 |
|
|---|
| 5044 | \sa QStyleOptionGraphicsItem::matrix
|
|---|
| 5045 | */
|
|---|
| 5046 |
|
|---|
| 5047 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5048 | \class QStyleHintReturn
|
|---|
| 5049 | \brief The QStyleHintReturn class provides style hints that return more
|
|---|
| 5050 | than basic data types.
|
|---|
| 5051 |
|
|---|
| 5052 | \ingroup appearance
|
|---|
| 5053 |
|
|---|
| 5054 | QStyleHintReturn and its subclasses are used to pass information
|
|---|
| 5055 | from a style back to the querying widget. This is most useful
|
|---|
| 5056 | when the return value from QStyle::styleHint() does not provide enough
|
|---|
| 5057 | detail; for example, when a mask is to be returned.
|
|---|
| 5058 |
|
|---|
| 5059 | \omit
|
|---|
| 5060 | ### --Sam
|
|---|
| 5061 | \endomit
|
|---|
| 5062 | */
|
|---|
| 5063 |
|
|---|
| 5064 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5065 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::HintReturnType
|
|---|
| 5066 |
|
|---|
| 5067 | \value SH_Default QStyleHintReturn
|
|---|
| 5068 | \value SH_Mask \l QStyle::SH_RubberBand_Mask QStyle::SH_FocusFrame_Mask
|
|---|
| 5069 | \value SH_Variant \l QStyle::SH_TextControl_FocusIndicatorTextCharFormat
|
|---|
| 5070 | */
|
|---|
| 5071 |
|
|---|
| 5072 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5073 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5074 |
|
|---|
| 5075 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5076 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5077 |
|
|---|
| 5078 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l SH_Default for
|
|---|
| 5079 | this class).
|
|---|
| 5080 |
|
|---|
| 5081 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 5082 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 5083 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 5084 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 5085 |
|
|---|
| 5086 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5087 | */
|
|---|
| 5088 |
|
|---|
| 5089 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5090 | \enum QStyleHintReturn::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5091 |
|
|---|
| 5092 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5093 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5094 |
|
|---|
| 5095 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 5096 |
|
|---|
| 5097 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 5098 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 5099 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 5100 |
|
|---|
| 5101 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5102 | */
|
|---|
| 5103 |
|
|---|
| 5104 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5105 | \variable QStyleHintReturn::type
|
|---|
| 5106 | \brief the type of the style hint container
|
|---|
| 5107 |
|
|---|
| 5108 | \sa HintReturnType
|
|---|
| 5109 | */
|
|---|
| 5110 |
|
|---|
| 5111 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5112 | \variable QStyleHintReturn::version
|
|---|
| 5113 | \brief the version of the style hint return container
|
|---|
| 5114 |
|
|---|
| 5115 | This value can be used by subclasses to implement extensions
|
|---|
| 5116 | without breaking compatibility. If you use qstyleoption_cast<T>(), you
|
|---|
| 5117 | normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 5118 | */
|
|---|
| 5119 |
|
|---|
| 5120 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5121 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturn with version \a version and type \a
|
|---|
| 5122 | type.
|
|---|
| 5123 |
|
|---|
| 5124 | The version has no special meaning for QStyleHintReturn; it can be
|
|---|
| 5125 | used by subclasses to distinguish between different version of
|
|---|
| 5126 | the same hint type.
|
|---|
| 5127 |
|
|---|
| 5128 | \sa QStyleOption::version, QStyleOption::type
|
|---|
| 5129 | */
|
|---|
| 5130 |
|
|---|
| 5131 | QStyleHintReturn::QStyleHintReturn(int version, int type)
|
|---|
| 5132 | : version(version), type(type)
|
|---|
| 5133 | {
|
|---|
| 5134 | }
|
|---|
| 5135 |
|
|---|
| 5136 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5137 | \internal
|
|---|
| 5138 | */
|
|---|
| 5139 |
|
|---|
| 5140 | QStyleHintReturn::~QStyleHintReturn()
|
|---|
| 5141 | {
|
|---|
| 5142 |
|
|---|
| 5143 | }
|
|---|
| 5144 |
|
|---|
| 5145 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5146 | \class QStyleHintReturnMask
|
|---|
| 5147 | \brief The QStyleHintReturnMask class provides style hints that return a QRegion.
|
|---|
| 5148 |
|
|---|
| 5149 | \ingroup appearance
|
|---|
| 5150 |
|
|---|
| 5151 | \omit
|
|---|
| 5152 | ### --Sam
|
|---|
| 5153 | \endomit
|
|---|
| 5154 | */
|
|---|
| 5155 |
|
|---|
| 5156 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5157 | \variable QStyleHintReturnMask::region
|
|---|
| 5158 | \brief the region for style hints that return a QRegion
|
|---|
| 5159 | */
|
|---|
| 5160 |
|
|---|
| 5161 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5162 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturnMask. The member variables are
|
|---|
| 5163 | initialized to default values.
|
|---|
| 5164 | */
|
|---|
| 5165 | QStyleHintReturnMask::QStyleHintReturnMask() : QStyleHintReturn(Version, Type)
|
|---|
| 5166 | {
|
|---|
| 5167 | }
|
|---|
| 5168 |
|
|---|
| 5169 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5170 | \enum QStyleHintReturnMask::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5171 |
|
|---|
| 5172 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5173 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5174 |
|
|---|
| 5175 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SH_Mask} for
|
|---|
| 5176 | this class).
|
|---|
| 5177 |
|
|---|
| 5178 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 5179 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 5180 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 5181 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 5182 |
|
|---|
| 5183 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5184 | */
|
|---|
| 5185 |
|
|---|
| 5186 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5187 | \enum QStyleHintReturnMask::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5188 |
|
|---|
| 5189 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5190 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5191 |
|
|---|
| 5192 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 5193 |
|
|---|
| 5194 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 5195 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 5196 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 5197 |
|
|---|
| 5198 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5199 | */
|
|---|
| 5200 |
|
|---|
| 5201 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5202 | \class QStyleHintReturnVariant
|
|---|
| 5203 | \brief The QStyleHintReturnVariant class provides style hints that return a QVariant.
|
|---|
| 5204 | \since 4.3
|
|---|
| 5205 | \ingroup appearance
|
|---|
| 5206 | */
|
|---|
| 5207 |
|
|---|
| 5208 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5209 | \variable QStyleHintReturnVariant::variant
|
|---|
| 5210 | \brief the variant for style hints that return a QVariant
|
|---|
| 5211 | */
|
|---|
| 5212 |
|
|---|
| 5213 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5214 | Constructs a QStyleHintReturnVariant. The member variables are
|
|---|
| 5215 | initialized to default values.
|
|---|
| 5216 | */
|
|---|
| 5217 | QStyleHintReturnVariant::QStyleHintReturnVariant() : QStyleHintReturn(Version, Type)
|
|---|
| 5218 | {
|
|---|
| 5219 | }
|
|---|
| 5220 |
|
|---|
| 5221 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5222 | \enum QStyleHintReturnVariant::StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5223 |
|
|---|
| 5224 | This enum is used to hold information about the type of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5225 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5226 |
|
|---|
| 5227 | \value Type The type of style option provided (\l{SH_Variant} for
|
|---|
| 5228 | this class).
|
|---|
| 5229 |
|
|---|
| 5230 | The type is used internally by QStyleHintReturn, its subclasses, and
|
|---|
| 5231 | qstyleoption_cast() to determine the type of style option. In
|
|---|
| 5232 | general you do not need to worry about this unless you want to
|
|---|
| 5233 | create your own QStyleHintReturn subclass and your own styles.
|
|---|
| 5234 |
|
|---|
| 5235 | \sa StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5236 | */
|
|---|
| 5237 |
|
|---|
| 5238 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5239 | \enum QStyleHintReturnVariant::StyleOptionVersion
|
|---|
| 5240 |
|
|---|
| 5241 | This enum is used to hold information about the version of the style option, and
|
|---|
| 5242 | is defined for each QStyleHintReturn subclass.
|
|---|
| 5243 |
|
|---|
| 5244 | \value Version 1
|
|---|
| 5245 |
|
|---|
| 5246 | The version is used by QStyleHintReturn subclasses to implement
|
|---|
| 5247 | extensions without breaking compatibility. If you use
|
|---|
| 5248 | qstyleoption_cast(), you normally do not need to check it.
|
|---|
| 5249 |
|
|---|
| 5250 | \sa StyleOptionType
|
|---|
| 5251 | */
|
|---|
| 5252 |
|
|---|
| 5253 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5254 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(const QStyleHintReturn *hint)
|
|---|
| 5255 | \relates QStyleHintReturn
|
|---|
| 5256 |
|
|---|
| 5257 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the \l{QStyleHintReturn::type}{type}
|
|---|
| 5258 | and \l{QStyleHintReturn::version}{version} of \a hint.
|
|---|
| 5259 |
|
|---|
| 5260 | Example:
|
|---|
| 5261 |
|
|---|
| 5262 | \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_styles_qstyleoption.cpp 0
|
|---|
| 5263 |
|
|---|
| 5264 | \sa QStyleHintReturn::type, QStyleHintReturn::version
|
|---|
| 5265 | */
|
|---|
| 5266 |
|
|---|
| 5267 | /*!
|
|---|
| 5268 | \fn T qstyleoption_cast<T>(QStyleHintReturn *hint)
|
|---|
| 5269 | \overload
|
|---|
| 5270 | \relates QStyleHintReturn
|
|---|
| 5271 |
|
|---|
| 5272 | Returns a T or 0 depending on the type of \a hint.
|
|---|
| 5273 | */
|
|---|
| 5274 |
|
|---|
| 5275 | #if !defined(QT_NO_DEBUG) && !defined(QT_NO_DEBUG_STREAM)
|
|---|
| 5276 | QDebug operator<<(QDebug debug, const QStyleOption::OptionType &optionType)
|
|---|
| 5277 | {
|
|---|
| 5278 | switch (optionType) {
|
|---|
| 5279 | case QStyleOption::SO_Default:
|
|---|
| 5280 | debug << "SO_Default"; break;
|
|---|
| 5281 | case QStyleOption::SO_FocusRect:
|
|---|
| 5282 | debug << "SO_FocusRect"; break;
|
|---|
| 5283 | case QStyleOption::SO_Button:
|
|---|
| 5284 | debug << "SO_Button"; break;
|
|---|
| 5285 | case QStyleOption::SO_Tab:
|
|---|
| 5286 | debug << "SO_Tab"; break;
|
|---|
| 5287 | case QStyleOption::SO_MenuItem:
|
|---|
| 5288 | debug << "SO_MenuItem"; break;
|
|---|
| 5289 | case QStyleOption::SO_Frame:
|
|---|
| 5290 | debug << "SO_Frame"; break;
|
|---|
| 5291 | case QStyleOption::SO_ProgressBar:
|
|---|
| 5292 | debug << "SO_ProgressBar"; break;
|
|---|
| 5293 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolBox:
|
|---|
| 5294 | debug << "SO_ToolBox"; break;
|
|---|
| 5295 | case QStyleOption::SO_Header:
|
|---|
| 5296 | debug << "SO_Header"; break;
|
|---|
| 5297 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3DockWindow:
|
|---|
| 5298 | debug << "SO_Q3DockWindow"; break;
|
|---|
| 5299 | case QStyleOption::SO_DockWidget:
|
|---|
| 5300 | debug << "SO_DockWidget"; break;
|
|---|
| 5301 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3ListViewItem:
|
|---|
| 5302 | debug << "SO_Q3ListViewItem"; break;
|
|---|
| 5303 | case QStyleOption::SO_ViewItem:
|
|---|
| 5304 | debug << "SO_ViewItem"; break;
|
|---|
| 5305 | case QStyleOption::SO_TabWidgetFrame:
|
|---|
| 5306 | debug << "SO_TabWidgetFrame"; break;
|
|---|
| 5307 | case QStyleOption::SO_TabBarBase:
|
|---|
| 5308 | debug << "SO_TabBarBase"; break;
|
|---|
| 5309 | case QStyleOption::SO_RubberBand:
|
|---|
| 5310 | debug << "SO_RubberBand"; break;
|
|---|
| 5311 | case QStyleOption::SO_Complex:
|
|---|
| 5312 | debug << "SO_Complex"; break;
|
|---|
| 5313 | case QStyleOption::SO_Slider:
|
|---|
| 5314 | debug << "SO_Slider"; break;
|
|---|
| 5315 | case QStyleOption::SO_SpinBox:
|
|---|
| 5316 | debug << "SO_SpinBox"; break;
|
|---|
| 5317 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolButton:
|
|---|
| 5318 | debug << "SO_ToolButton"; break;
|
|---|
| 5319 | case QStyleOption::SO_ComboBox:
|
|---|
| 5320 | debug << "SO_ComboBox"; break;
|
|---|
| 5321 | case QStyleOption::SO_Q3ListView:
|
|---|
| 5322 | debug << "SO_Q3ListView"; break;
|
|---|
| 5323 | case QStyleOption::SO_TitleBar:
|
|---|
| 5324 | debug << "SO_TitleBar"; break;
|
|---|
| 5325 | case QStyleOption::SO_CustomBase:
|
|---|
| 5326 | debug << "SO_CustomBase"; break;
|
|---|
| 5327 | case QStyleOption::SO_GroupBox:
|
|---|
| 5328 | debug << "SO_GroupBox"; break;
|
|---|
| 5329 | case QStyleOption::SO_ToolBar:
|
|---|
| 5330 | debug << "SO_ToolBar"; break;
|
|---|
| 5331 | case QStyleOption::SO_ComplexCustomBase:
|
|---|
| 5332 | debug << "SO_ComplexCustomBase"; break;
|
|---|
| 5333 | case QStyleOption::SO_SizeGrip:
|
|---|
| 5334 | debug << "SO_SizeGrip"; break;
|
|---|
| 5335 | case QStyleOption::SO_GraphicsItem:
|
|---|
| 5336 | debug << "SO_GraphicsItem"; break;
|
|---|
| 5337 | }
|
|---|
| 5338 | return debug;
|
|---|
| 5339 | }
|
|---|
| 5340 |
|
|---|
| 5341 | QDebug operator<<(QDebug debug, const QStyleOption &option)
|
|---|
| 5342 | {
|
|---|
| 5343 | debug << "QStyleOption(";
|
|---|
| 5344 | debug << QStyleOption::OptionType(option.type);
|
|---|
| 5345 | debug << "," << (option.direction == Qt::RightToLeft ? "RightToLeft" : "LeftToRight");
|
|---|
| 5346 | debug << "," << option.state;
|
|---|
| 5347 | debug << "," << option.rect;
|
|---|
| 5348 | debug << ")";
|
|---|
| 5349 | return debug;
|
|---|
| 5350 | }
|
|---|
| 5351 | #endif
|
|---|
| 5352 |
|
|---|
| 5353 | QT_END_NAMESPACE
|
|---|